cnc cf卡读取(1500元左右的手机哪款好用)

1、cnc cf卡读取，1500元左右的手机哪款好用？

谢邀！

其实我们来看用户的条件首先在1500元上下的价格，其次是可玩性高，也就是说系统什么要有特点，最为重要的呢是要高通系列处理器。可以说证明用户其实还挺懂手机市场的一些潜规则，比如各类软件包括游戏等等，对于高通处理器的优化还是最到位的。

而现在1500元上下价格档位的产品很多，在使用天玑的处理器，从参数上来看，联发科的天气处理器似乎比较强势，但实际的效果和宣称还是有明显的区别。

在这样的条件下，单单一个高通处理器，可能就筛选掉了很多产品，那么IQOO Z3或许是一个不错的选择！

IQOO出品，必属精品

事实上了解这个品牌的用户都知道，这个系列所推出的产品既保证了性价比，又保证了亮点，还有不错的额外升级，相比于一般的性价比产品而言，更加全能一些。

IQOOZ3就是这样主打性价比，而且偏完美的产品。外观上来看，这款产品为了缩减成本，尽量将价格下调，采用了水滴全面屏的设计，并没有采用打孔全面屏。当然由于过渡部分采用了水滴的弧度，所以总体的观感其实是没有任何问题的。

在后背的设计部分呢，则是比较有意思，仍然是以简约化的设计为主，摄像头的模块和底下的logo部分对称式的排列，而摄像头的排列方式呢也很有意思，两颗摄像头的竖直排列，一颗摄像头和一枚闪光灯呢平行横置排列。

总体的质感表现还是不错的，至少没有廉价化产品的状态。

硬件如何？

那么从硬件素质来看呢，首先搭载了高通骁龙768G处理器，6GB起步的LPDDR4x运行内存以及增强版的ufs2.2 128GB的存储，起的硬件素质的表现不错，ufs2.2的闪存规格的相比于ufs2.1提升了不少，其次呢高通骁龙768，这处理器相比于高通骁龙765G处理器同样性能也提升了15%左右。

可以说这个硬件素质配合vivo的系统级别优化，比如说游戏模式以及多线程的加速技术，再加上超级液冷散热技术，主流的游戏表现都非常不错，温度控制也比较合适，而高通骁龙765G处理器呢，既保证了硬件的性能，同时在功耗以及温度方面的控制还是不错的。

至于在充电续航部分呢，则是搭载了一块4400毫安时的电池容量匹配了55瓦的超级闪充标准，30分钟左右呢，能够将这块大电池充到70%以上，这个速度呢已经可以满足用户碎片化时间补充电量！

除此之外呢，在拍照部分表现也同样不错，搭载了一枚6,400万像素的主摄，以及一枚800万像素的超广角镜头和一枚200万像素的微距镜头，总体而言，配合vivo的相机优化能力，让这款手机的拍照也能够达到2000元价格档位的水准！

在屏幕方面呢，首先支持目前非常火热的高刷新率，拥有120Hz的高刷新率和180Hz的触控采样率，这在信息流产品的滑动以及游戏过程之中的顺畅，用户都能够感知的非常清楚，除此之外呢，还支持P3广色域以及hdr10的显示效果。

总体来看，这款产品基本保证了智能手机各项的技术标准，保证了一个很高的性价比，同时又达成了很高的均衡度，在硬件性能方面也有基础性的保障。

2、如何自学英语？

英语是国际 *** 语言，是金融界语言，是空中交通管制语言，是流行音乐的语言，涵盖了人类生活的方方面面，学好英语就如同打开了一扇世界之窗，我国是经济大国，普及英语更是国情需要。

单词

背词的 *** 因人而异，但是万变不离其宗，就是要多写、多读，还要多用。背单词的目的不单单是要会念会写，既然是从零开始，那么首先要掌握的必然是26个字母和48个国际音标的发音和写法了。我这边先为大家介绍一下音标的读法：

元音

1.单元音：前元音[i]、[e]、[ae] ；中元音︰[A]、[o:]；后元音︰[u:]、[u]、[o:]、[o]、[a:]

2.双元音：开合双元音：[ei]、[ai]、[oi]、[ou]、[au]、[ie]、[eo]、[u=]

3辅音：爆破音：清辅音[p]、[t]、[k]；浊辅音：[b]、[d]、[g]；摩擦音：清辅音：[f]、[s]、[O]、[h]；浊辅音：[v]、[z]、[]、[6]、[r]；爆破音：[t]、[tr]、[ts]；浊辅音：[d3]、[dr]、[dz]；鼻音：[m]、[n]、[n]；半元音：[0]、[w]。

（学习音标的话可以在该视频链接中跟着老师一块学习和认识音标https://haokan.baidu.com/v?pd=wisenatural&vid=2050891487235808454）

学习单词视频链接：https://v.qq.com/x/page/u33089etcsv.html

以下的内容是我总结出的关于单词的一个分类总结。

名词（n.）

英语名词是用来表示人或事物名称的词。按照不同的分类标准，名词可以分为专有名词和普通名词；可数名词和不可数名词。

1、专有名词(Proper noun)

它是特定的某个人、地方或机构的名称。专有名词的之一个字母必须大写。如：Newton牛顿，San Francisco旧金山，Russia俄罗斯，United Nations联合国。

2、普通名词(common noun)

它是某一类人、事物或某种物质或抽象概念的名称。如：lawyer律师，market市场，computer计算机，rice大米，magazine杂志，freedom自由。

3、可数名词

可数名词是指能以数目来计算，可以分成个体的人或东西，因此它有复数形式。如：cup(杯子)，cat(猫)等。

4、不可数名词

不可数名词是指不能以数目来计算，不可以分成个体的概念、状态、品质、感情或表示物质材料的东西；它一般没有复数形式，只有单数形式，它的前面不能用不定冠词a/an。如：milk(牛奶)，bread(面包)，coffee(咖啡)等。

动词（V.）

英语动词简称“v.”。 一般就是用来表示动作或状态的词汇。基本上每个完整的句子都有一个动词，要表示第二个动作时可使用不定词、动名词、对等连接词、从属连接词或增加子句等 *** 连结。

代词（pron.）

代词是代替名词的一种词类.大多数代词具有名词和形容词的功能.英语中的代词,按其意义、特征及在句中的作用分为：人称代词、物主代词、指示代词、反身代词、相互代词、疑问代词、关系代词、连接代词和不定代词九种。（如下图列举几种）

介词（prep）

介词是一种用来表示词与词，词与句之间的关系的词。在句中不能单独作句字成分。介词后面一般有名词代词或相当于名词的其他词类，短语或从句作它的宾语。介词和它的宾语构成介词词组，在句中作状语，表语，补语或介词宾语。（部分介词的用法如下图）

数词（num.）

数词是指表示数目多少或顺序多少的词。英语中的数词分为基数词和序数词，基数词是表示数目多少的数词。

基数词

基数词用来表示数目多少，它包括表示数字的所有单词，记忆这些数字可以用数字构成分类记忆法。下图是我整理的一个简单的总结。

基数的作用

如下图，是我整理的关于基数作用的归纳。

序数词

序数词用来表示次序，在汉语中表示为“第几”，如：之一(first)、第二(second)、第三(third)...。序数词在书写时可以缩写first缩写为1st，second缩写为2nd,third缩写为3rd。下图是我总结整理的一个具体变换样式。

序数词除了之一，第二，第三或个位数为一，二，三结尾的序数词外，其它序数词都是以-th结尾的，缩写也是对应的数字加-th，如fourth(第四)缩写为4th。同时也要注意第五、第八、第九、第十二的拼写变化。下图是我总结整理的变换样式。

20-90整十位数序数词需要将对应的基数词词尾中的y变为i，然后加eth构成。 21-99非整十位数序数词需要十位数用基数词，个位数用相应的序数词。十位数和个位数之间用连字符“-”连接。

如下图是我整理的20-90整十位数序数词和21-99非整十位数序数词的部分内容。

序数词的用法

序数词在使用时，通常前面要加定冠词the。可以用来表示顺序、楼层、编号、日期中的日等。

2.3.1.用来表示顺序，如:

I am always the first to come to school.

我总是之一个来学校的。

2.3.2.用来表示楼层，如:

My aunt lives on the fourth floor.

我姑妈住在四楼。

2.3.3.用来表示编号,其结构为:the +序数词+名词=名词(首字母要大写) +基数词。如:

第九部分the ninth part=Part nine

第四课the fourth lesson=Lesson Four

第六段the sixth paragraph= Paragraph six

温馨提示:编号较大时，一般仅用第二种表达法。Room 101，表示101号房间。

2.3.4.用来表示年、月、日: "年"用基数词， “日用序数词”，如:

1949年10月1日一写法：Oct. 1st, 1949.读作：Oct.(the) first，nineteen forty-nine.

2017年2月28日一写法：February 28th，2017读作：February， (the) twenty-eighth，two

thousand and seventeen.

2.3.5.序数词作"几分之几”时,有复数形式。如:

1/5→one fifth; 2/3→two thirds；4/7→four sevenths；1/2→a half；1/4→one fourth =a quarter；3/4→three fourths =three quarters；50%→ fty hundredths ( fty percent).

2.3.6.有些序数词可以构成固定词组和习语,如:

on second thoughts再三考虑

frst of all首先

at first当初

from first to last从头到尾

on second thoughts再三思考

second to none名列前茅

形容词（adj.）

遇到一个生词的时候要先查字典，看看这个词有几个词性，每一词性下对应的意思是什么；其次，查找这个单词衍生出的其它词性的单词，例如：credit（信誉）是名词，加上词缀-ible之后变为credible（可信的；可靠地)，作形容词和副词。

英语形容词可以根据词尾来识别。常见的形容词结尾如下:

●-able/-ible: credible, achievable, gullible, capable, illegible, sensible, remarkable, horrible

●-al: annual, functional, individual, logical, essential

●-ful: awful, cheerful, doubtful, faithful, forceful

●-ic: terrific, cubic, manic, rustic

●-ive: intensive, adaptive, attractive, di***issive, inventive, persuasive

●-less: doubtless, endless, fearless, helpless, homeless, breathless, car, groundless, restless

●-ous: adventurous, famous, generous, courageous, dangerous, tremen, fabulous.

副词（adv.）

说到副词对于初学者来说还有一个大块儿头是一定要记忆的，就是副词的十三种分类。记住这个的话，副词的主要脉络就抓住了。比如：副词表示方式、程度、时间什么的。但是，这里只说之一种，因为入门就是从简单的开始说，副词记住就是作状语，来修饰动词的。就这么简单。在句子中的位置放哪里都行。下图是作者整理的总结性归纳。图一和图二进行衔接观看。

图一

图二

冠词（art.）

不定冠词

a,an是不定冠词，只用在单数可数名词前面，表示“一”的意思。a用在以辅音开头的词前面；an用在以元音开头的词之前，如：a day;a boy;an apple等。

定冠词

the是定冠词，表示“这”“那”“这些”“哪些”的意思。可以用在单数、复数可数名词或不可数名词之前。

冠词的基本用法

(1)单数可数名前可用定冠词或不定冠词。

I have a cute dog.我有一只可爱的小狗。

(2)复数形式可数名词前可用定冠词或不定冠词。

(The ) cars are important in the westem counties.汽汽在西国家非常要。

(3)不可数名词前可用定冠词或不定冠词。

Oil is lighter than water.油比水轻。

(4)专有名词前一般不用冠词。

Beijing is the capital of China.北京中国的首都。

不定冠词a，an一般有any或one的意思，但不强调数目概念，只用来泛指事物，说明其名称或种类。

(1)当之一次提到某人或某物时，用a或an起介绍作用。

She is a teacher.她是一位老师。

(2)表示泛指某一类人或物。

A snake is a cold-blood animal.蛇是一种冷血动物。

(3)表示某一类人或事物的任何一 个。

This is a cat.这是一只猫。

(4)用于抽象名词之前，使抽象名词具体化。

It is a pity that you are late.很遗憾你迟到了。

The ltte child is a joy to his parents.这个孩子给他的父母带来了很多欢乐。

(5)用于物质名词之前，使物质名词普通化。

They made a fire to get warm.他们生火取暖。

注意:

(1) 当不定冠词所修饰的那个名词的之一个音(不是字母，而是读音)为元音时，不定冠词要用an，而以辅音开头时用a.

(2)在使用不定冠词时，要特别注意缩略词。

an unidentified flying object一个不明飞行物。缩略词: a UFO.

连词（conj.）

连词可以分成两类，一类是表示并列关系的连词。比如and, but, either…or, neither…nor等；一类是从属连词，用于引出从句，比如主语从句，宾语从句，状语从句等，比如that, if, when, so, for等。

并列连词又可以分成三类，一类是表示选择的并列关系的， 主要有or表示或者，否则，either...or不是...就是...，neither...nor....也不....例句如下:

What is your favoite，singing or dancing?什么是你的更爱?唱歌还是跳舞?

I like neither singing nor dancing.我既不喜欢唱歌也不喜欢跳舞.

Either you or he tells her the truth. 要么你告诉她真相，要么他告诉她真相。

另一类是表示转折关系的并列连词， 主要有but但是，while而等。 例句如下:

I like singing but dancing. 我喜欢唱歌但不喜欢跳舞。

I like singing, while my sister likes dancing. 我喜欢唱歌，而我姐姐喜欢跳舞。

还有就是表示并列关系的并列连词，比如and，bot...and，以及as...等。例句如下：

Don't waste food and time.不要浪费食物和时间。

This box is three times as big as that one.这个箱子比那个大三倍。

从属连词主要根据状语的类型来分类。引导时间状语从句的从属连词类型比较多，包括表示“当…时”的when，while，as或whenever；表示“在…之前或之后”的befroe和after；表示“自从或直到”的since，till和untile；表示“一…就…”的as soon as等。例句如下：

I was singing when she danced.当她在跳舞时，我在唱歌。

I sang when she was dancing.我唱歌时她正在跳舞。

She danced as soon as I sang.我一唱歌，她就跳舞。

引导原因状语从句的从属连词主要有：because，for，as，since等。例句如下：

I study s go to the best school.因为我想上更好的学校，所以我才这么努力

引导目的状语从句的从属连词主要有：in order that，so that，in case等。例句如下：

I study so hard in order that I can go to the best school.我如此努力是为了能上更好的学校。

引导结果状语从句的从属连词主要有：so that，so...that，such..that等。例句如下：

I studied so hard that I went to the best school.我学习那么努力，所以我上了更好的学校。

感叹词（int.）

英语感叹词有：indeed、Ah、what、dear、well、now、there、man、boy。下图是我整理的一个总结性笔记。

学习计划

在我们熟悉了解音标和单词之后我们就可以为自己制定学习计划了。以下是我总结出的学习计划， *** 不一定适应每个人，但是希望会对大家有一个帮助。

1.我们可以将5500个常见词汇分为30-50个Unit，每天背诵一个Unit（100-200个单词），一个月就可以完成一轮背诵，然后第二、三个月进行第二轮、三轮巩固复习。当然，每天早上背完一个新的Unit之后，我们需要在第30分钟、晚上、第2天、第4天、第7天、第15天及第30天、对每个单元进行及时重复复习。

2.【具体 *** 】：早上：拿一张白纸挡住中文意思，只看英文单词开始背诵，勾出不认识的单词。背完一个Unit之后，立刻把勾出的单词再背一遍（依旧遮住中文意思），如果还是有某个单词不认识，就再打勾背诵；30分钟后：把勾出来的单词重新自测一遍；晚上：睡前把打了2次及以上勾的单词重新自测一遍。以此类推，反复记忆。

3.【注意要点】：一定要严格按照表格重复，不要偷懒！不要偷懒！不要偷懒！如果偷懒一次，漏下一两个单元，今天耽误了，那明天想补救就会很难。比如，你3月20号背诵了Unit 12，你不仅要在30分钟后和晚上睡觉之前复习两遍Unit 10，你还需要在背完Unit 12后同步复习之前背过的Unit 9、Unit 8、Unit 6、Unit 3。

作者在这边也分享一下自己学习单词的视频链接：https://v.qq.com/x/page/u33089etcsv.html，该视频里可以帮大家有效的学习到单词的读音，同时在视频中也教给大家如何利用学到的音标来进行拼读单词。如果有兴趣学习的小伙伴们可以跟着视频进行单词的学习。

APP推荐

百词斩

全民用的最多最火的背单词神器，下载量高达3亿，评分超级高。关键是适合不同年龄层次的人，可根据自己的身份选择不同的单词文本，有小学、初中、高中、大学、四六级、专业六级、八级，适合零基础的成年人从头开始学习。还有不同的背单词场景，根据不同的图片背诵单词，记忆效果很好，对零基础的成年人很友好。

沪江开心词场

趣味性极强的背单词神器，成功解决了背单词枯燥无味的问题。这个APP更大的特点就是，在闯关的过程中，顺便把单词背诵了，轻松有趣，很适合成年人在上下班地铁上背诵。闯关的过程，也是检验你是否掌握单词的过程，不记住，闯不了关，让你干着急，激发你的闯关欲望。

扇贝单词

不仅可以背单词，还可以做笔记。和其他APP不一样，这个软件背诵单词的速度飞快，不过还会有第二轮的检验，反复巩固，加强背诵效果。背诵之前，还会问你认不认识这个单词，如果不认识，出现的频率会更高。

语法

我们认识了单词之后，就可以来了解每个单词组成句子的语法问题。其实任何一门学科都是由浅入深的，英语也不例外。学习语法就像造房子，首先要把基础的语法脉络理清，打好根基，之后再慢慢补充和拓展，让知识巩固起来。

英语语法最基础的就是简单句的组成，之后我们才会慢慢了解到并列句、复合句以及从句，以下是我总结出的语法内容，我们一起来看看吧！

简单句语法

所有的句子都是通过简单句而组合的，只不过句子的结构拓宽了一点， 词汇丰富了一点，从而演变为其他的长句。

1.主谓

主谓就是主语 + 谓语的组合，比如：Spring comes 。这句话中主语是spring ，谓语是 comes 。

主语就是引领句子的开头部分，是一个句子的主体，英文是 subject ，我们用字母 S 代替。谓语可以理解为动词，英文是 verb，我们用字母 v 代替。

2.主谓宾

根据字面的意思就是主语 + 谓语 + 宾语组合而成的句子，比如 ： I love you .

这句话中主语是 i ，谓语是 love ，宾语就是在谓语后面的词，这里是 you。

宾语的英文是 object，这里用字母 o 代替。

3.主谓宾宾

主语 + 谓语 + 宾语+ 宾语的句子。

这里的两个宾语都是谓语动词所产生作用的。

比如 ：I give you money .

这里的 you 和 money 都是 give 的宾语，give you 和 give money ，所以都是两个宾语。

4.主谓宾宾补

主语 + 谓语 + 宾语+ 宾补的句子。

比如 ：It makes me happy .

这里的 me 是 make 的宾语，但是 happy 不是 make 的宾语。

happy 是 me 的形容词，是一个宾补，全称为宾语补足语，起到了补充说明的作用。

注意 ：区分主谓宾宾和主谓宾宾补

主谓宾宾中的两个宾语都是谓语所产生的作用词，而主谓宾宾补中宾补是宾语的形容词，与谓语没有任何关系。

5.主系表

这里的系代表系动词。包含三个类别

A be 动词 ： am is are was were

B 感官动词 （五官）

look 看起来

sound 听起来

***ell 闻起来

taste 尝起来

feel 摸着....感觉......

C 变化动词

become / turn / go / get / grow

这里的表是代表表语，包括名词、形容词、介宾短语、不定式todo

比如 you are beautiful 这句话中，you 是主语，are 是系动词，beautiful 是表语。

并列句语法

简单句通过不同的连接词就成为了不同的句子，通过并列词成了并列句，通过从属连词成了复合句。下面我们就一一讲解 ：

并列句：简单句+并列词+简单句

并列词一般有：and/or/but/so/while/yet/for/however，

1.表示并列：

and，not only...but also...，neither...nor...

Her father is a doctor and her mother is a teacher .

2.表示选择：

or，or else，otherwise，either...or...

Hurry or you won't make the train.

3.表示对比、转折：

but，whileyet，however，never，

I like tea while she likes coffee.

4.表示原因：for

I am thirsty , for it is hot .

复合句：简单句+从属连词+简单句

从属连词有：that /wether/if。

从句语法

名词性从句

当名词性从句作为句子的不同成分时，又被称呼为不同的名字。

当作为主语时，称为主语从句。

当称为宾语时，称为宾语从句，同样表语从句以及同位语从句。以下我们来举个栗子 ：

主语从句 What she said is wrong .

宾语从句 I said that she was wrong.

表语从句 The fact is that he doesn’t really try.

同位语从句 The news that he will come back is ture.

记住一点，不管什么从句，你把它当成一个”长一点的名词”。

那如果这个长名词在句子中作主语，就是主语从句，作宾语就是宾语从句。

同位语从句就是相当于一个长点的名词对另外一个抽象名词进行解释说明。

定语从句

修饰限定名词，汉语中“的”前面的内容。

关系代词引导的定语从句

1.who指人，在从句中做主语 Yesterday I helped an old man who lost his way.

2. whom指人，在定语从句中充当宾语，常可省略。

Mr. Ling is just the boy whom I want to see

3. which指物，在定语从句中做主语或者宾语，做宾语时可省略

This is the pen (which) he bought yesterday.

4. that指人时，相当于who 或者whom；指物时，相当于which。

5. whose通常指人，也可指物，在定语从句中做定语。

指的是谁的。Do you like the book whose cover is yellow?

关系副词引导的定语从句

when where why

状语从句

修饰动作的发生的时间、地点、原因、方式。

1.时间状语从句

常用引导词：when, as, while, as soon as, before, after, since , till, until

特殊引导词：the minute, the moment, the second, every time, the day，the instant,

I was fat when I was a child.

2.地点状语从句

常用引导词：where

特殊引导词：wherever, anywhere, everywhere

Keep it where you can see it.

3.原因状语从句

常用引导词：because, since, as, for

特殊引导词：seeing that, now that, in that, considering that, given that.

My friends dislike me because I’m beautiful .

4.目的状语从句

常用引导词：so that, in order that

特殊引导词：lest, in case, for fear that，in the hope that, for the purpose that, to the end that

study hard so that you can pass the exam.

5.结果状语从句

常用引导词：so … that, so… that, such … that,

特殊引导词：such that, to the degree that, to the extent that, to such a degree that,

He got up so early that he caught the first bus.

6.条件状语从句

常用引导词：if, unless,

特殊引导词：as/so long as, only if, providing/provided that, supposing that, in case that, on condition that

If you ask him, he will help you.

7.方式状语从句

常用引导词：as, as if, how

特殊引导词：the way

Think as i think

8.比较状语从句

常用引导词：as(同级比较), than(不同程度的比较)

特殊引导词：the more … the more … ; just as …， so…; A is to B what /as X is to Y; no … more than; not A so much as B

The house is three times as big as ours.

9.让步状语从句

常用引导词：though, although, even if, even though

特殊引导词： as(用在让步状语从句中必须要倒装)，while ( 一般用在句首 )，no matter …， in spite of the fact that, while, whatever, whoever, wherever, whenever, however, whichever

Though I believe it，yet I must consider.

时态、语态问题

时态的本质是：时+态。

所以学习时态，一定要把时和态分开来看待。

I am a teacher.

这句话，时间是“现在时”，状态是“一般态”

英语里有4种时间：

过去，现在，将来，过去将来

英语里有4种状态：

一般态：非完成，非进行

进行态：动作的延续

完成态：在截止时间时，完成了的事情

完成进行态(几乎不用)：过去是，到截止时间是，将来还是的事情(强调截止时间)

如下图，两个是我整理的笔记内容。

学习计划

1.从阅读时理解语法，再用语法书夯实理解而成的专业知识。举一个典型的例子。冠词the看似简单，实际上用法难懂变化多端。一本详细的语法书通常会记录数十条应用the的规则，及其不计其数的不可抗力事件，并且除外中依然存在除外。

2.学精语法，英语语感比规则关键。培养阅读英文的好习惯。仍以the为例。每一次读书的时候难免会遇到the字数十次，而每次都是看到不同情况，不同类型的句型。

3.读书时碰到疑惑，前去阅览语法书。这时候，语法书里的复杂规则就恰好派上用场了。由于你明白自己要请，都知道这种语法规则用于具体的语句。

以下几个图片是我在网上进行搜索归纳的总结性笔记，一列为一种总结内容，图一至图四为整体内容，图二衔接图一结尾，图三衔接图二结尾，图四衔接图三结尾。

图一

图二

图三

图四

给大家讲了这么多书面上的语法问题，作者在这里给学习英语的小伙伴们介绍一下我在学习英语时候借鉴的视频。视频中老师充分讲解了初步学习英语适用的语法问题，在讲解的同时还为大家用例句进行了说明。视频链接如下：https://www.bilibili.com/video/av934142897/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b）

推荐书籍

《英语魔法师之语法俱乐部》

本书内容非常简单，可以帮助语法薄弱的学习者慢慢理解语法。它分为三个部分：初级句型、中级句型和高级句型。初级句型共讲解了五种基本句型；中级句型有四种，即形容词从句、名词从句、状语从句和倒装句。另外这本书的冠词、不定式和动名词的语法相比其他语法书的讲解更透彻。

《English Grammar in Use》

本书的语法范例，主要是以情景为例，将抽象的语法概念更具体化、也易于理解。书中材料均来自英语母语国家，表达地道，让学习者可以学以致用，让学习的效率更好。全书图文并茂，内容生动，对语法知识点进行分类对比，可以让学习者快速梳理思路，学习起来事半功倍。

《柯林斯英语语法》

《柯林斯英语语法》的体例和所有的英语语法书都不一样，不是按照句型排列的，而是按照表达法和表达功能排列的，而内容也侧重于灵活实用的功能语法讲解，强调语法和词汇的结合。

句子

通过了单词和语法的认识，持之以恒记忆对话、课文中的佳句是丰富我们语言，积累句式的好 *** 。而能对熟悉的句子进行变通也是学习英语的重要技巧之一。现在虽然考试不考句型转换，但是句型转换可以加深我们的记忆和知识的拓展。（想详细了解英语造句内容的可以在该视频链接中跟着老师一块学习和认识英语基础https://www.bilibili.com/video/av763971245/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b）

句子成分

句子的组成部分，包括主语、谓语、宾语、定语、状语、表语、补语、同位语和独立成分9种，其中，主语和谓语是主要成分有，表语、宾语、定语、状语、补足语、同位语和独立成分是次要成分。

一、主语

主语是句子叙述的主体，可由名词、代词、数词、名词化的形容词、不定式、动名词和主语从句等来承担。

The sun rises in the east. (名词)

He likes dancing. (代词)

二、谓语

谓语说明主语所发出的动作或具有的特征和状态。谓语由动词来承担。

We often speak English in class.

三、宾语

宾语是动作的对象或承受者，常位于及物动词或介词后面。宾语可由名词、代词、数词、名词化的形容词、不定式、动名词、宾语从句等来担任。

除少数句子（如祈使句和感叹句等）外，一句话必须同时具有主语和谓语所表达的意思才能完整。主语是针对谓语而言的，是一句话的主题，谓语用来说明主语的情况，为主语提供信息。例如：They are working.主语是they(他们)，那么他们在做什么呢？看来没有谓语are working 是不行的。在正常情况下，英语的主语和谓语的位置与汉语一致，也就是说主语在前，谓语紧跟其后。

He pretended not to see me. (不定式短语)

I enjoy listening to popular music. (动名词短语)

四、定语

定语用于描述名词,代词,短语或从句的性质,特征范围等情况的词叫做定语,定语可以由名词,形容词和起名词和形容词作用的词,短语担任。如果定语是单个词,定语放在被修饰词的前面,如果是词组,定语放在被修饰词的后面。

Guilin is a beautiful city. (形容词)

China is a developing country; America is a developed country. (分词)

五、状语

状语说明事情发生的时间,地点,原因,目的,结果方式,条件或伴随情况,程度等情况的词叫状语。状语一般由副词、介词短语、分词和分词短语、不定式或相当于副词的词或短语来担当。其位置一般放在句末，但也可放在句首或句中，修饰动词、形容词、副词等。

Light travels most quickly. (副词及副词性词组)

He has lived in the city for ten years. (介词短语)

六、补语

补语的作用对象是主语和宾语,具有鲜明的定语性描写或限制性功能,在句法上是不可或缺的。补语是起补充说明作用的成份。最常见的是宾语补足语。名词、动名词、形容词、副词、不定式、现在分词、过去分词都可以在句子中作宾补。

His father named him Dongming. (名词)

They painted their boat white. (形容词)

七、表语

表语是用来说明主语的性质,身份,特征和状态。表语须和系动词一起构成句子的复合谓语。表语一般放在系动词之后。表语可以由名词,形容词或起名词和形容词作用的词和短语担任。

常见的系动词有: be, sound(听起来), look(看起来), feel(摸起来), ***ell(闻起来), taste(尝、吃起来), remain(保持，仍是), feel(感觉)

八、同位语

同位语当两个指同一事物的句子成分放在同等位置时，一个句子成分可被用来说明或解释另一个句子成分，前者就叫做后者的同位语.这两个句子成分多由名词（代词）担任，同位语通常皆放在其说明的名词（代词）之后。同位语和补语的区别在于：补语不能缺少，同位语可以缺少。

九、独立成分

独立成分，是当一个词、短语或从句用在句子里面，与句子的其他成分只有意义上的联系而没有语法关系时，它就称为独立成分。常见的独立成份有呼吁、惊叹语、答语、插入语、介词短语、非谓语动词所构成的短语及形容词、副词所引起的词组等。

陈述句

陈述句是陈述一个事实或者说话人的看法。它包括肯定句和否定句两种。陈述句在书写时句末用句号，而在朗读时则用降调。陈述句的核心是非常基础的。这个句子里有一个名词和一个动词。句子可以有其他成分，如形容词、副词和其他词。但是最简单的形式就是名词和动词。

陈述句的基本句型：

(1)主语+连系动词+表语

(2)主语+谓语(不及物动词)

(3)主语+谓语(及物动词) +宾语

(4)主语+谓语(及物动词) +间接宾语+直接宾语

(5)主语+谓语(及物动词) V.+宾语+宾语补足语

肯定句

The river flooded.河水泛滥了。(主谓 )

He has a sense of humor.他有幽默感。(主谓滨)

He can teach you English.他可以教你英语。(主谓+双宾)

He painted the desk blue.他把书桌涂成了色。(主谓滨宾补)

He is a doctor.他是一名医生。(主系表)

否定句

The river did not/didn't flood. 河水没有泛滥。

He does not/doesn't have (has not 1 hasn't) a sense of humor.他没有幽默感。

He can not/can't teach you English. 他不能教你英语。

He didn't paint the desk blue.他没有把书桌涂成蓝色。

He is not/ He's not/ He isn't a doctor.他不是一 名医生。

疑问句

一般疑问句

通常用来询问一件事情或一种情况是否属实，其回答通常是yes或no，因此这类问句又叫做“是非问句”。下面是句型。

Is there something wrong with this machine?这台机器有问题吗?

Have you got today's milk?你拿到今天的牛奶了吗?

Shall we go on?我们继续向前吗?

Will he not agree with you?他不同意你吗?

Haven't you any sisters?你没有姐妹吗?

Don't you like this movie?你不喜欢这部电影吗?

特殊疑问句

特殊疑问句是对句中的某一部分提出疑问，通常以who、where、when、why等疑问词开头，因此又叫“wh-问句”。下面是句型。

Who are you?你是谁?

Whom are you going to play table tennis this afternoon?今天下午你和谁打乒乓球?

Whose glasses are broken?谁的眼镜打碎了?

Which shoes do you like?你喜欢哪双鞋子?

What do they want to do?他们想要做什么?

When does she want to practice?她想要什么时候练习?

Where is the restroom?洗手间在哪里?

Why did you leave?你为什么离开了 ?|

How do you study English?你怎么学习英语?

选择疑问句

选择疑问句是对问题提出两个或两个以上的答案供对方选择的疑问方式。下面是句型。

Shall we go by bus or by train?我们乘汽车还是乘秋车?，

Shall I give you a hand, or you can manage?要我帮你,还是你自己解决?

Which do you prefer, coffee or tea?你要哪一样, 咖啡还是茶?

Coffee or tea?咖啡还是茶?

Which do you lie best, singing, dancing or skating?唱歌、 跳舞和溜冰，你最喜欢哪样?

反义疑问句

反意疑问句又称为附加疑问句，英语称为tag question，是一种常用于口语的疑问句式，主要由“陈述句(或祈使句) + 疑问句”构成。下面是句型。

陈述句有 be 动词时，以该be动词形成反问；陈述句有助动词（will、shall、can、have...）时，以该助动词形成反问；陈述句只有动词时，按主语人称及该动词时态，置 do、does、did 形成反问。下面是句型。下面是句型。

Study hard, will you?要用功，好不好?

Don't do it, will you?不要做这件事，好不好?

Let me go, will you?让我走，好不好?

Let's stop here, shall we?我们在这里停下，好吗?

There is wifi at this cafe, isn't there?在这个咖啡厅有无线 *** ，对吗?

The clock is slow, isn't it?表走得慢，对吗?

Your are good at math, aren't you?你擅长数学,对吗?

John is going to study English, isn't he? John会学习英文,对吗?

祈使句

祈使句是英语中的一个句式，也是用于表达命令、请求、劝告、警告、禁止等的句子。祈使句最常用于表达命令，因此在学校文法中也常称为命令句。下图是归纳的总结性笔记。

感叹句

感叹句是英语四大功能句型之一，主要用来表示高兴、愤怒、厌恶或者欣赏等强烈感情的句子，句末通常用感叹号！结尾，说话时用降调。下图是归纳的总结性笔记。

简单句

由一个主语（并列主语）和一个谓语（并列谓语）构成。只有一套主谓结构。主语可理解为“谁？”，谓语视为“做什么？”“是什么？”。

简单句五种基本句型：

主系表 SVP

主谓SV

主谓宾SVO

主谓双宾SVOO

主谓宾宾补SVOC

下图是归纳的总结性笔记。

并列句

是并列句由两个或者两个以上的简单句并列而成，有两套或两套以上的主谓结构。并列句的基本句型：“分句+并列连词/特殊符号+分句”。并列连词：and(和，而且) but(但是) yet (但是) for (因为) so (所以)。下图是归纳的总结性笔记。

特殊句式

存在句

存在句在英语中是用来表示人或事物的存在、出现等意义，而且大都是用于描述性文章中。存在句可以从结构，句型来分析，可以有多种时态形式。相关的语法重点有：存在句的谓语动词，存在句非限定形式，存在句主谓一致等。下图是归纳的总结性笔记。

省略句

在英语中，名词可以省略，动词可以省略，动词当中不但系动词这样的可以省略，连实意动词也是可以省略的，只要它已经出现过了。会使用省略句是英语水平走向高阶的一个标志，在使用省略句的时候，不要担心对方看不懂或者听不懂。只要你用的正确，不存在别人不能理解。下图是归纳的总结性笔记。

倒装句

为了强调、突出等词语的目的而颠倒原有语序的句式叫做倒装句。在倒装句中，颠倒了的成分可以恢复原位而句意基本不变，句法成分不变。英语倒装句的7种形式，希望能帮助你理解英语句子。下图是归纳的总结性笔记。

强调句

强调句型是一种特殊句式，用于表示说话者强烈的感情或意愿。强调就是通过某种手段使句中某一部分所包含的信息比一般情况下显得更重要。强调句型的结构如图所示：

学习计划

【之一步】：看大标题，图片，小标题，看完之后大概猜测文章是关于什么的，目的在于对文章有个模糊的印象。

【第二步】：重点略读，主要读每段之一句和最后一句，大概了解每个段的内容，目的在于对文章结构有个整体把握，比如典型的结构——介绍问题、给出原因、提出解决 *** 、说明潜在风险、对未来进行判断。

【第三步】：全文略读，读的时候让尽可能多的信息进入眼眶，略读次要信息，抓重点信息(核心观点、重要前提、重要假设)，并对重点信息进行精读，同时对觉得不错的内容再进行标记。目的在于掌握重点信息，方面以后复查或者积累写作素材。(这时候不懂的单词可以圈起来，只要不影响文章大意理解就不查，等到最后一步再查)

【第四步】：不断来回查找信息，对比是否存在疏漏，目的在于梳理文章结构，掌握文章整体脉络。

【第五步】：带着结构重新略读阅读信息，精读标记信息，看是否理解清楚，是否需要进一步的查询工作。

学习计划制定好后，作者这边推荐小伙伴们可以在b站上跟着这位老师学习学习，他的视频内容充分的为大家解决了句型问题，同时还利用造句的方式帮助小伙伴们可以更加深刻的了解英语句子的组成部分，视频链接如下：https://www.bilibili.com/video/av763971245/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b

阅读外文文章

《读者文摘》

读者文摘在全球多个国家和地区都有发行。1922年创刊，这是一本能引起大众广泛兴趣的内容丰富的家庭杂志。它所涉及的故事文章涵盖了健康、生态、 *** 、国际事务、体育、旅游、科学、商业、教育以及幽默笑话等多个领域。适用人群是英语初、中级水平学习者及考研党。

同时，由于内容具有思考价值、探讨性和实用性，中国英语考试中有不少题目和材料来源于这本杂志。非常适合考试党提高英语能力和语感，是夯实英语基础的大众型读物。

购买方式：直接联系中图订购纸本，这种刊物在国内订阅是完全许可的。都是英文原版，按期引进。读者文摘是那种小册子，时代是标准的杂志。现在国家对外籍刊物进口管理比较严格，自己从网上订电子版往往会被屏蔽掉。

《经济学人》

这是一份由伦敦经济学人报纸有限公司出版的杂志，创办于1843年9月，创办人詹姆士·威尔逊。杂志的大多数文章写得机智，幽默，有力度，严肃又不失诙谐，并且注重于如何在最小的篇幅内告诉读者最多的信息。该杂志又以发明巨无霸指数闻名，是社会精英必不可少的读物。

里面的文章十分经典，经常出现在考研的阅读理解里面，可见里面的用词、用句的高水平。还有很重要的一点，就是《经济学人》里面还会涉及大量的词汇、固定搭配以及长难句，不仅仅是提升阅读水平，对于词汇积累、语法提升等都大有好处。

就里面所有的板块和内容而言，个人最喜欢其中的 obituary 和 special report 部分，前者会写很多有趣的人，很有意思。后者则涉及政治、经济、社会、科技领域的时新专题报道，属于涨知识的必备栏目。

阅读方式：一些免费提供离线资源的网站，这块要用谷歌搜，或者用必应国际版，但很多更新更新着就不更新了，免费的可以搜一个关键词：西贝博客。还有国内一些网站提供付费的离线资源，这块是一种选择，只要会用指令搜索，就可以搜索进行查看。

还有就是通过发邮件到经济学人官方，咨询他们有哪些授权渠道商，再通过这些渠道商去订阅。

英语中期学习

听力

我们在锻炼听力的时候一定不要听那些东拼西凑的英语磁带，而是选择一个听力材料就彻底把它拿下。材料里的每一个单词、每一个短语都要听清楚。为了达到这一点，你必须听写。

明确学习任务

之一步是先纠正自己的音标，这是最基础的，我们之所以听不懂是因为我们发音不标准，我们也听不出来英语发音。所以首先必须纠正好自己的音标。

第二步是要扩大自己的单词量，好多人不注意这一点，认为听力的单词量有限，但是一定要把自己的单词量扩大到一定的范围。

第三步是训练听力，首先训练单个单词，先听单个单词，然后在逐渐的听句子，这是很主要的，要循序渐进。

第四步是在听听力的时候，一定要在自己听不懂的地方多听几遍，并把相关的单词和句子抄下来，经常去阅读。

第五步是每天坚持听听力至少2个小时，这是非常关键的一步，不要怕辛苦，坚持下来就行。

第六步是可以坚持看美剧或者坚持听外国的音乐和相关的歌曲，对自己的听力都有很大的帮助。

听力的基础练习可以在b站上搜索发音词典（这是用户）进行用于听力练习，这个老师的视频中开头部分就为大家制定好了听力规则，在观看视频的时候也可以充分的锻炼自己的英语听力。视频的链接如下：https://www.bilibili.com/video/BV1ZY411N7jx/?spm_id_from=333.337.search-card.all.click&vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b

学习小技巧

1、学会抓关键词

在听力过程中，我们要学会抓其中的关键词。在语段之间的停顿时间，快速浏览选项，对比其不同之处，在听的过程中通过关键词判断说话者的身份，帮助自己搜索相关背景知识。

2、学会划分意群

很多人在听的时候都是逐个单词地听，想要听懂每一个单词。其实这样做是没有必要的，也是很难做到的。因此，我们要学会划分意群来听，分词组分词块来听会帮助你节省很多时间，并能让你更快地理解句子是什么意思。

3、学会提前思考

在听力开始之前，你就要浏览完材料，结合选项开始思考。这段话要讲什么，目的又是什么。并学会猜测，包括对话题的预测、甚至通过常识进行答案的预测。这样才能在考试之中处于主动的位置，所以，听听力要积极主动。

4、学会做笔记

好的笔记能够让你的思路清晰，让你了解听力内容的结构。在听力的开头结尾时就要集中精神，记住相关信息，因为那很有可能就是听力的重点。有时考点在出题时是按照顺序来出的，因此笔记能帮助我们排除一些干扰选项。

5、学会注意数字

要注意以下几方面：常规数字的连读，百分数，分数，小数，百分比， *** 号码，航班号，驾照号，信用***等等。

推荐学习网站

BBC Learning English

我一定要把它放在之一位，因为只要想到网路上的免费英文学习资源，之一个要推荐的绝对是BBC Learning English。

这个被公认为全球更佳的英文学习网站，不只具有英文单字词汇、文法、发音、听力、会话、阅读以及学习测验等丰富多元的学习教材，而且也一直持续更新教学内容。

除了可以用网路学习之外，也可以免费下载mp3语音和文字稿到电脑，当作持续自学进修练习的免费教材。

TED

TED Talks是可以一边听演讲一边训练英文听力的网站。在这里有不同领域的专业人士所发表的科学、娱乐、文化、教育、艺术等等专题英文演讲影片，除了训练正式英文的听力之外，还可以增长知识，开拓自己的视野。可以观看约10~20分钟TED Talks练习英文听力，听不懂时，还可阅读演讲稿理解影片内容。

English Online France

English Online France是一个非常有趣的在线英文听力训练网站，依照初级、中级和高级区分的英文听力训练教材共超过一百个项目，包括听写练习与测验的MP3语音教材以及听力练习与测验的影片。

口语

语言不是教会的，而是在使用中学会的。交际能力只能在交际中得到最有效的培养。一个优秀的语言学习者应具有强烈的语言交际的欲望，应力争语言训练的各种机会。应该不怕因犯语言错误而被别人讥笑。（口语的基础练习可以在b站上搜索，也可以结合下文讲解，在该连接中看视频配合学习https://www.bilibili.com/video/av378675437/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b）

明确学习任务

1. 一定要用完整句子对话

面对任何问题，都不能只回答表面内容，一定要在此基础上展开回答。如果别人问你一个问题，你只回答 Yes 或者 No，那如何提高口语呢？即使遇到了一个你根本不了解或者不会的问题，也千万不要用：“Sorry, I don’t know”或者“No”来回应。比如别人问了一个最基础的问题，“Where are you from?” 你千万不能只说：“I come from Beijing.”正确的做法是：先说明你来自北京，然后介绍一下北京的风土人情、家乡美食等等，最后再和对方互动一下，问你去过北京吗？或者你觉得北京这座城市怎么样呢？

2.多使用一些复杂句和从句

然后在平时练习过程中，要将简单句和复杂句交错使用，不要一直用简单的句子，这样会显得你的水平很 Low，也不要一直说很复杂的句子，因为很容易出错。在变换不同的句式的时候，记得不要出错。避免一直说简单句的更好 *** 就是，多说一些稍微复杂一点的从句，比如定语从句、条件状语从句、主语从句等等，同时一些相同意思的句子也不要用重复表达，要学会多尝试用不同的句式说出来。

3.通过美剧学习口语

通过美剧学习英语口语也是很多人可能有尝试的 *** ，对于上班族来说可以一边放松心情的同时学习英语。我建议可选择那些与日常生活比较贴近、故事情节较强的影视材料。例如金色年代。

口语的基础练习可以在b站上搜索MrYang杨家成，这个老师讲解的每个视频内容虽然简短，但是老师在讲解前就利用学生的错误发音进行纠正，充满趣味性的同时也能认识到口语发音方面的错误。我这边为大家找到一个不错的视频内容，链接如下：https://www.bilibili.com/video/av378675437/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b，如果需要的话可以试着看看一看。

英音发音学习

1.建立英音的肌肉反射

在我们开始在美音和英音间做出实质性的发音改变之前。我们首先要知道，发音的改变是要体现在每一个音上的，这样的改变才能导致整体上发音的变化。这包括说话过程中嘴型的变化，以及嘴部肌肉运动方式的变化。这是一个整体上的变化。并不只在有某个变化音的词里，你才能听到这样的变化，而是在每个音节上都可以听的出来。

所以想要练习一口标准的英式英语，之一步也是必不可少的一步就是练习音标。将每个音标老老实实的学习，通过肌肉发射，对后面的英式英语的口语练习能有很大的帮助。

2.建立英音语言环境

学一门语言，更好的当然就是处于一个特定的语言环境内。既然我们是在国内，没有办法实现英式英语的环境，那么我就可以通过听力来实现输入的问题，通过口语来实现输出的问题。

而对于锻炼听力，最推从的 *** 就是听万能的BBC了。你要知道，在BBC，不仅仅只有新闻的，BBC还有很多栏目，比如BBC Learning，就是可以通过上面的视频进行练习口语听力的栏目。

3.建立口语交流机制

现在互联网这么发达，我们完全可以通过sns来和世界交流。你只要学会FAN墙，就可以通过Facebook、Twitter、Whatsapp来找到愿意和你交流的人，如果他愿意学习中文是再好不过的了，这样互助互利是最持久的。不过记住，我们是要练习英式英语，所以更好找英国，或者加拿大的。

4.英式发音技巧

“R”不发音，不卷舌

T不发D音，发T音或不发音

请注意，“H”并不总是发音

单词“been”的读音是“bean”，而不是“bin”

结尾降调

美音发音学习

1.准备好学习的视频参照物

仅仅是自己照着音标、课本练习朗读，不能使自己的发音改善。学习发音视频教程，才是最容易、最直观、最简单的 *** 。因为，可以直观地看到美国人的嘴形、舌头的位置，这样可以很容易自我调整。

请在免费WiFi下，请自行百度：美式发音训练视频教程(汇总贴)。可以很容易找到美国Paul老师的视频教程。

2.制定学习计划，每天学习1集视频

每天观看1集视频，并且在安静、不被打扰的环境下学习。跟着视频一起，自己张口练习。练习时，不用去记忆生词，只需要张口练习发音就好。

学习完1集视频后，找找自己熟悉的单词、简单句子，按照刚刚学会的 *** 轻松、张口朗读。

嘴巴重新习惯需要时间。所以，请在学习第2、3、4天，轻松复习第1天学习的发音，并张口练习。这时，不用重新看视频，只需要读一读单词、简单句子。

3.巩固训练

在平时自己朗读自己喜欢的文章时，特意留意学会的新的发音。这是进步的最后一步。如果自己没有调整，还是按照自己以前的发音 *** ，那就没进步了!

如果按照这样的步骤，认真练习，任何一个自己不会的发音，每位朋友都可以在1周内熟练掌握。1个月内就可以掌握所有的标准美式发音了。

4.强化训练

如果学习过美国Paul老师的教程，还觉得不够。再推荐一个视频教程：

美国 Lisa 老师的——Lisa美语视频教程。请按照同样的反复，每次学习30分钟吧

5.美式发音技巧

当字母R出现在最后一个字母位置的时候，要发卷舌音。

当字母R的后面紧跟一个辅音字母的时候，这里的R要发音/r/

美式发音中的第二个特征,是关于美式浊化音。比如letter这个单词，其中的字母t就需要百分之五十浊化成发音/d/，有点类似ladder了。.

口语app

扇贝口语

这是一款旨在让用户“听得懂、说得出”的英语口语学习app，适合所有阶段人群，扇贝口语的课程系统完善，而且形式比较丰富，包括角色扮演，发音打分和故事模式，通过跟读以及听音复述和智能打分的形式，帮助培养开口习惯，纠正发音错误。

流利说英语

这是一款智能口语打分软件，内置各种以场景为主题的课程，你可以跟读模仿，然后系统会根据你的发音情况进行打分，他的练习材料非常丰富，从教材到职场，从生活到影视剧，而且都有难度划分，逐渐升级。

英语后期学习

练习

后期就要把你珍藏的真题拿出来了，从头到尾掐准时间（可以在开始的时候把时间写在卷题上，结束对照一下时间），作文可以先不写（前5套真题左右，把作文专项练习一下），一套真题两三天左右吃透，半个月时间把作文好好练习一下（文末附有大小作文模板以及视频），做完对照答案，（如何分析和做阅读，前面的文章已经讲过了）分数依然不重要，重要的是知道自己的薄弱地方，单词、语法、阅读速度还是注意力的问题。

背单词

单词不用说，该背还要背，这个时间可以有侧重点的背，同时还需要把重点放在真题中单词上来，一定要注意熟词僻义。

阅读

仔细思考做题过程中的这个题做错了，为什么做错，我当初怎么想的，答案又是怎么说的，有没有了解出题人的意图，带着这些问题，把错的选项分析一遍，做个小结，在题旁边标注，属于哪种错误，是粗心大意还是单词或者翻译错误等；其次是单词，这个单词我背过吗，是生词还是背过忘了，然后查出这个单词，记在自己的单词本或者在单词出处记下来，第二天背下来。

作文

怎么构思，如果这次试卷就是考试，我该从哪下手，我是不是又用了，老掉牙的词，背的好词好句有没有用上等；最后就是总结，把阅读、单词、作文遇到的问题做个总结，做个规划去处理，然后第二天去复习，直到这张试卷你认为没有什么价值了，那么你复盘总结就是成功的。

总结

最后说一下完成这个阶段所需的时间，我建议用两个月去完成是比较合适的。不要拖太长时间，不要在学习的舒适区呆太久。我们是需要感觉到自己在进步，需要有很多正反馈才能继续坚持学习的。

%3Chowto_content%3E[{"type":"paragraph","attrs":{"is_abstract":true},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"英语是国际 *** 语言，是金融界语言，是空中交通管制语言，是流行音乐的语言，涵盖了人类生活的方方面面，学好英语就如同打开了一扇世界之窗，","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"我国是经济大国，","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"普及英语更是国情需要。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnX6vMqZxgns9mjfIR7aq1sd"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"单词","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuxF06Stq6O0au8uSuOPYpb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"背词的 *** 因人而异，但是万变不离其宗，就是要多写、多读，还要多用。背单词的目的不单单是要会念会写，既然是从零开始，那么首先要掌握的必然是26个字母和48个国际音标的发音和写法了。我这边先为大家介绍一下音标的读法：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnh6EDeaDDgCKE7rfIdqGbkh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"元音","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnb49IWEx***uUEFu2UaJXJve"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"1.单元音：前元音[i]、[e]、[ae] ；中元音︰[A]、[o:]；后元音︰[u:]、[u]、[o:]、[o]、[a:]","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniR0xoQAwPp10oxZK30iSEb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"2.双元音：开合双元音：[ei]、[ai]、[oi]、[ou]、[au]、[ie]、[eo]、[u=]","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnplvNfSsO***D0Ew7pLWWvYc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"3辅音：爆破音：清辅音[p]、[t]、[k]；浊辅音：[b]、[d]、[g]；摩擦音：清辅音：[f]、[s]、[O]、[h]；浊辅音：[v]、[z]、[]、[6]、[r]；爆破音：[t]、[tr]、[ts]；浊辅音：[d3]、[dr]、[dz]；鼻音：[m]、[n]、[n]；半元音：[0]、[w]。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnr4W5QwCQzCNSki5B4w4f1f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（学习音标的话可以在该视频链接中跟着老师一块学习和认识音标","id":""},{"type":"external_link","attrs":{"url":"https://haokan.baidu.com/v?pd=wisenatural\u0026vid=2050891487235808454"},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"https://haokan.baidu.com/v?pd=wisenatural\u0026vid=2050891487235808454","id":""}],"text":"","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmrhR5MK4nmR5LR8O6yQbeT"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"学习单词视频链接：","id":""},{"type":"external_link","attrs":{"url":"https://v.qq.com/x/page/u33089etcsv.html"},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"https://v.qq.com/x/page/u33089etcsv.html","id":""}],"text":"","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEgeoWLZT4M4vORBJtoqLLe"},{"type":"imageList","children":[{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":361,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"单词","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/30a0fb6ae5fc49c784433ef71e2c81e6","width":541},"text":"","id":"doxcnairL6iMHNXUIUXQWFns3Xf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":545,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"单词","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/806f1274e6754f8fa045d38422b80f70","width":801},"text":"","id":"doxcn3CuDAaHWIiqedjSEzdZQAh"}],"text":"","id":"doxcn53I7b7m3kN67hW4gpQX3RL"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"以下的内容是我总结出的关于单词的一个分类总结。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn53I7b7m3kN67hW4gpQX3RL"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"名词（n.）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCEvxlGEHLswaa0vbrbckDh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"英语名词是用来表示人或事物名称的词。按照不同的分类标准，名词可以分为专有名词和普通名词；可数名词和不可数名词。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnlh4Q7ODsYMrPE3dOHqNoNf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"1、专有名词(Proper noun)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnR6TnhMLEYpJw1ryAxAmzrb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"它是特定的某个人、地方或机构的名称。专有名词的之一个字母必须大写。如：Newton牛顿，San Francisco旧金山，Russia俄罗斯，United Nations联合国。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnxBCCyEqVmEbSdNcB9muoCc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"2、普通名词(common noun)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnl1ianjNpY7UeYT7NONx8Tc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"它是某一类人、事物或某种物质或抽象概念的名称。如：lawyer律师，market市场，computer计算机，rice大米，magazine杂志，freedom自由。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnK6apgNhL7YDhIk2YR0LASd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"3、可数名词","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnO5sgpnXlfExWljLK6k8jvc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"可数名词是指能以数目来计算，可以分成个体的人或东西，因此它有复数形式。如：cup(杯子)，cat(猫)等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnNkCrVRH82Vs0gk5p63jEWg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"4、不可数名词","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnrOfaRKPfZJ2Zo3f8H7sg3c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"不可数名词是指不能以数目来计算，不可以分成个体的概念、状态、品质、感情或表示物质材料的东西；它一般没有复数形式，只有单数形式，它的前面不能用不定冠词a/an。如：milk(牛奶)，bread(面包)，coffee(咖啡)等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnLP6OPA4MTCcx2rDoRg7rgb"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"动词（V.）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniYNTDByFinTiEhgxl7a7be"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"英语动词简称“v.”。 一般就是用来表示动作或状态的词汇。基本上每个完整的句子都有一个动词，要表示第二个动作时可使用不定词、动名词、对等连接词、从属连接词或增加子句等 *** 连结。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnJ8Q65VgXDg6bepX5Vlwrlg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":263,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"动词（V.）","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/c32267c6dd10461b8283ca3e5ea7e6c1","width":394},"text":"","id":"doxcnxTqUgHQi8WqmTzrpQu4ivd"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"代词（pron.）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnfsEIzKKEq0j2RWhn1N48od"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"代词是代替名词的一种词类.大多数代词具有名词和形容词的功能.英语中的代词,按其意义、特征及在句中的作用分为：人称代词、物主代词、指示代词、反身代词、相互代词、疑问代词、关系代词、连接代词和不定代词九种。（如下图列举几种）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcndsFHK3R6gNvxsJd1aUxkHf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":455,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"代词（pron.）","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/151af1aa0fb14aa39e7c0516d102101e","width":759},"text":"","id":"doxcnAsAOXgbji1P5RzMlotVHgf"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"介词（prep）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIRtesECJsl86mR1qUYgs9d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"介词是一种用来表示词与词，词与句之间的关系的词。在句中不能单独作句字成分。介词后面一般有名词代词或相当于名词的其他词类，短语或从句作它的宾语。介词和它的宾语构成介词词组，在句中作状语，表语，补语或介词宾语。（部分介词的用法如下图）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnu1XVviQ72RjwYgSua9K8xb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":438,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"介词（prep）","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/2220502a5c91443e886cd5b0fbb7adda","width":644},"text":"","id":"doxcnbEPt5AzCqILJzhzL5bXq3d"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"数词（num.）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAq7rSQz3DQTTZQhJl39uYg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"数词是指表示数目多少或顺序多少的词。英语中的数词分为基数词和序数词，基数词是表示数目多少的数词。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn1wgNeJ6qn8Yao2***B6vMUd"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"基数词","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnovWPOlFExe9UzzvYp5D9Nb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"基数词用来表示数目多少，它包括表示数字的所有单词，记忆这些数字可以用数字构成分类记忆法。下图是我整理的一个简单的总结。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCP0gi16U8k9D1h0ggZPxEe"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":465,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"基数词","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/8ce11edda66244aab0c0ed55d4107563","width":746},"text":"","id":"doxcnz8OW1aZaKBlutmiDFjMZvg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"基数的作用","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOUnBqmYZWWcD5ebTKQwRmd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如下图，是我整理的关于基数作用的归纳。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnrhwSd4gdMvXljnnexunADf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":530,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"基数词","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/5bc24f37038a4dd689dd16109f68b992","width":795},"text":"","id":"doxcnu6JCG3zhbQ2JZHIYFCeg7n"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"序数词","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnNd2QMlUsW4a7 *** xY4Bz9jg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"序数词用来表示次序，在汉语中表示为“第几”，如：之一(first)、第二(second)、第三(third)...。序数词在书写时可以缩写first缩写为1st，second缩写为2nd,third缩写为3rd。下图是我总结整理的一个具体变换样式。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn7wJeogWPgEKgp2DJpUjovd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":248,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"序数词","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/55b5956998b44a49aa1220de1b60b254","width":439},"text":"","id":"doxcn8IJuGKCRF4sdMOsC68UIGd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"序数词除了之一，第二，第三或个位数为一，二，三结尾的序数词外，其它序数词都是以-th结尾的，缩写也是对应的数字加-th，如fourth(第四)缩写为4th。同时也要注意第五、第八、第九、第十二的拼写变化。下图是我总结整理的变换样式。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnb17IQMLHEk3C6TcRW5PXie"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":305,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"序数词","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/ce2900cdba8544a1aaf11a4761ac57c2","width":563},"text":"","id":"doxcn6U6rQAkruuAM1tVzDR7QNf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"20-90整十位数序数词需要将对应的基数词词尾中的y变为i，然后加eth构成。 21-99非整十位数序数词需要十位数用基数词，个位数用相应的序数词。十位数和个位数之间用连字符“-”连接。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnnog1pLNpDDqAqGebm8xMW5"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如下图是我整理的20-90整十位数序数词和21-99非整十位数序数词的部分内容。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnjb9X9jgK4or1tSLa93Ukyd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":255,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"序数词","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/8086d8fc824847afaccd238a3d8ca0b8","width":406},"text":"","id":"doxcnj9iMee8eyg0TsyAAnAQKld"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"序数词的用法","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn1zQvWJnkEguR0fWt0XUXzh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"序数词在使用时，通常前面要加定冠词the。可以用来表示顺序、楼层、编号、日期中的日等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8R1OLRlbnmUNBbYNOZI3Ce"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2.3.1.用来表示顺序，如:","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn3BOQ063TyoGw6kGwe98SQb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I am always the first to come to school.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnhFPHKUz2nRivPKgw9Y7kkf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"我总是之一个来学校的。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnRA2j1N5MF9lRQnKDE6jbqe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2.3.2.用来表示楼层，如:","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnORD5KBBDjLRkPHxnXvVu5g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"My aunt lives on the fourth floor.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAtW1eyAgbUMMvUO34hXf8m"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"我姑妈住在四楼。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcndV8H1OWQ7ZRZh61zziVGee"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2.3.3.用来表示编号,其结构为:the +序数词+名词=名词(首字母要大写) +基数词。如:","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQi6GBYiKZ9RypRLGstSonc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"第九部分the ninth part=Part nine","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnJGDvyoRlf13B6fZk6S37Ib"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"第四课the fourth lesson=Lesson Four","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnntosWHt503kQCJRNraH9Tf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"第六段the sixth paragraph= Paragraph six","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6JQFe7QOZuUFsV3sUwnwMd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"温馨提示:编号较大时，一般仅用第二种表达法。Room 101，表示101号房间。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnASpg96TjmioiSgBPlCDR7f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2.3.4.用来表示年、月、日: \"年\"用基数词， “日用序数词”，如: ","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYUQWucoGUt2Tdl0pPHlzDf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"1949年10月1日一写法：Oct. 1st, 1949.读作：Oct.(the) first，nineteen forty-nine.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcntcPU***22TTPF3CCTNbYhtg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"2017年2月28日一写法：February 28th，2017读作：February， (the) twenty-eighth，two","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcno6PL39A3Vfjayd4yy3ARZZ"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"thousand and seventeen.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6bri8oRhtnjIxRA2CMfCZd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2.3.5.序数词作\"几分之几”时,有复数形式。如:","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWulPJ9ZStHilTAu14qiKqf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"1/5→one fifth; 2/3→two thirds；4/7→four sevenths；1/2→a half；1/4→one fourth =a quarter；3/4→three fourths =three quarters；50%→ fty hundredths ( fty percent).","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnpVYZOz8vVd6PUUk7ahvCFg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2.3.6.有些序数词可以构成固定词组和习语,如: ","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnBu1TNOlgctvRBdDXzI4XYe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"on second thoughts再三考虑","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnL50XgJiaMu8NzIfgIKHkPh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"frst of all首先","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEmu4pu0u3J7JxoVPtdzgdf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"at first当初","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnrtiVST8ICM0IHlsldPtSib"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"from first to last从头到尾","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnM6R6A***xv5FaYt4CAPagwh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"on second thoughts再三思考","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcndX8mtXgkZI2ee63TaOpx9d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"second to none名列前茅","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnR1IIFsDaBmw7yPpCoq3ccf"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"形容词（adj.）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnebm8nfkllzjMjXkoFXGVNK"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"遇到一个生词的时候要先查字典，看看这个词有几个词性，每一词性下对应的意思是什么；其次，查找这个单词衍生出的其它词性的单词，例如：credit（信誉）是名词，加上词缀-ible之后变为credible（可信的；可靠地)，作形容词和副词。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyMqyHOtXSEadbbOs7hb3Ac"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"英语形容词可以根据词尾来识别。常见的形容词结尾如下:","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0nh7wQ05TVDsox28qM19Dc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"●","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"-able/-ible:","id":""},{"type":"text","text":" credible, achievable, gullible, capable, illegible, sensible, remarkable, horrible","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnpHo2orVvzX8MZ8n7Mh2yEh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"●","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"-al:","id":""},{"type":"text","text":" annual, functional, individual, logical, essential","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnspwpQ9oPCLzynHHexaKlkT"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"●","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"-ful:","id":""},{"type":"text","text":" awful, cheerful, doubtful, faithful, forceful","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnaxzjCIiMWym1Qp5x17pobg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"●","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"-ic:","id":""},{"type":"text","text":" terrific, cubic, manic, rustic","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyLv6TOhxiY5GzmxzytVGIg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"●","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"-ive:","id":""},{"type":"text","text":" intensive, adaptive, attractive, di***issive, inventive, persuasive","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnZ6qXOIEBfUPOy3k5ymrDaf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"●-less: ","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"doubtless, endless, fearless, helpless, homeless, breathless, car, groundless, restless","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnZnhqTT6irXSy1Qc36p2mEg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"●","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"-ous:","id":""},{"type":"text","text":" adventurous, famous, generous, courageous, dangerous, tremen, fabulous.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6A5f4GIZ1f9bV95fRjzOob"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"副词（adv.）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnY4K7kYFLB50w4U46uanZRh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"说到副词对于初学者来说还有一个大块儿头是一定要记忆的，就是副词的十三种分类。记住这个的话，副词的主要脉络就抓住了。比如：副词表示方式、程度、时间什么的。但是，这里只说之一种，因为入门就是从简单的开始说，副词记住就是作状语，来修饰动词的。就这么简单。在句子中的位置放哪里都行。下图是作者整理的总结性归纳。图一和图二进行衔接观看。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnjsOeDiLcaY5OTNNsUcrTRd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":428,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"副词（adv.）","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/fb96301675234ac48478f5ba034ab6f7","width":637},"text":"","id":"doxcnctrOmPeJgC8S8Gb66TaJt6"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"图一","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnxBSvGMnH5nuJHgL1H7y7Yg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":412,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"副词（adv.）","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/95b36c589bf1477d98dbce931beeb6d3","width":635},"text":"","id":"doxcn1modnqtebcTjCaqTOR68k9"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"图二","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqDcDQ5LWl79VebIF4K4JFh"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"冠词（art.）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniUVR0tZOrjRqQK1h0Ou6ld"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"不定冠词","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnFYjjhDrCwcWOA7ETG9bVUc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"a,an是不定冠词，只用在单数可数名词前面，表示“一”的意思。a用在以辅音开头的词前面；an用在以元音开头的词之前，如：a day;a boy;an apple等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn1ubgb6aXZ7Bc9eS0kPT46g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"定冠词","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnfi2HNoomvn17DTcIYkgc09"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"the是定冠词，表示“这”“那”“这些”“哪些”的意思。可以用在单数、复数可数名词或不可数名词之前。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnBparDtLKVxYcR9GvviFz1b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"冠词的基本用法","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnby0Uyt6vA5a0OgGZO8R9TR"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(1)单数可数名前可用定冠词或不定冠词。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnen9rEqIh5wr1DyXJLM4pDf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I have a cute dog.我有一只可爱的小狗。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnxn2fdC3c***bbzZUxdQySWg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(2)复数形式可数名词前可用定冠词或不定冠词。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnS8UdMEZhM36UlFVYuuz88U"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(The ) cars are important in the westem counties.汽汽在西国家非常要。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnejQxE0ObCzRl49Zw8Mkq5w"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(3)不可数名词前可用定冠词或不定冠词。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn9HwLBBNXyxnXz18KPYNKOb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Oil is lighter than water.油比水轻。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcndCOSG1zaN1RTJM6zXwhPwB"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(4)专有名词前一般不用冠词。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnbLyKedELK0ZQHetc2qvLlc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Beijing is the capital of China.北京中国的首都。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnFKHIGNrOdtq7ZDOOrDeAeb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"不定冠词a，an一般有any或one的意思，但不强调数目概念，只用来泛指事物，说明其名称或种类","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkHNa28SDN6Cph6cAtbwEgb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(1)当之一次提到某人或某物时，用a或an起介绍作用。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnLNrD9qIvnZA7AVlFmEggNf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"She is a teacher.她是一位老师。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnxqtP *** ChGJVOX2ex4UZCuc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(2)表示泛指某一类人或物。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnefWis0FFsWLkWr0cf3eXdd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"A snake is a cold-blood animal.蛇是一种冷血动物。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKbikLl4nEr4mXUtXbgJ9pb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(3)表示某一类人或事物的任何一 个。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqPkrN3VdxO5OIzF8rzxFlA"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"This is a cat.这是一只猫。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnhxJFy1p8IOJnESgClWa6Tb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(4)用于抽象名词之前，使抽象名词具体化。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnNgkY45Ul9TbMWHxbLBcABe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"It is a pity that you are late.很遗憾你迟到了。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnj7fYGtJ9xwbzhcBUwlSCng"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"The ltte child is a joy to his parents.这个孩子给他的父母带来了很多欢乐。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn5aN09PLUQc5I3Tz5iYpoNb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(5)用于物质名词之前，使物质名词普通化。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn30GLVplhVUCKSRSOkMMo1d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"They made a fire to get warm.他们生火取暖。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIcYtcymoKKzcucKclvGEMg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"注意:","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn19vNhHNag5VnNodx3zNxT5"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":" (1) 当不定冠词所修饰的那个名词的之一个音(不是字母，而是读音)为元音时，不定冠词要用an，而以辅音开头时用a.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnBvYWKfziOFfvG1ad9fVFcd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(2)在使用不定冠词时，要特别注意缩略词。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn58yFtBw66IIwDaZ3C95LEe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"an unidentified flying object一个不明飞行物。缩略词: a UFO.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnrhZ71AK9Q8SoQYndoiZFyb"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"连词（conj.）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn5ltxUFxOFfSAoDke4vyajc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"连词可以分成两类，一类是表示并列关系的连词。比如and, but, either…or, neither…nor等；一类是从属连词，用于引出从句，比如主语从句，宾语从句，状语从句等，比如that, if, when, so, for等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnpK9ncNqDTc9CaVilhT3Jhc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"并列连词又可以分成三类，一类是表示选择的并列关系的， 主要有or表示或者，否则，either...or不是...就是...，neither...nor....也不....例句如下:","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuuNgYATQKgT9yCvRo46zse"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"What is your favoite，singing or dancing?什么是你的更爱?唱歌还是跳舞?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGjvj48VBiz9KDIkm6e33uh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I like neither singing nor dancing.我既不喜欢唱歌也不喜欢跳舞.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnetCcs49rR98ehs8SWALA2f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Either you or he tells her the truth. 要么你告诉她真相，要么他告诉她真相。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngQNBhmwSU5nlrLkPMvj4gf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"另一类是表示转折关系的并列连词， 主要有but但是，while而等。 例句如下:","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnldk9C8HN6cpjGWIuZIsL0c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I like singing but dancing. 我喜欢唱歌但不喜欢跳舞。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnvLchdOUrD1rqyz0tzoi6lg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I like singing, while my sister likes dancing. 我喜欢唱歌，而我姐姐喜欢跳舞。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnPqYrMeKe1pLgKwzwE0u9Df"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"还有就是表示并列关系的并列连词，比如and，bot...and，以及as...等。例句如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn81q42VaPhwB34mKZkhHYVb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Don't waste food and time.不要浪费食物和时间。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnfktjQAKXprUub3d0Kfd7Df"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"This box is three times as big as that one.这个箱子比那个大三倍。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncU8nJZJpElc8hXZcCtLaNd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"从属连词主要根据状语的类型来分类。引导时间状语从句的从属连词类型比较多，包括表示“当…时”的when，while，as或whenever；表示“在…之前或之后”的befroe和after；表示“自从或直到”的since，till和untile；表示“一…就…”的as soon as等。","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"例句如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnxBAFUHs2OEIpYxk12TqBLc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I was singing when she danced.当她在跳舞时，我在唱歌。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnLAREmDqwVTcVyeMfekp8Dd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I sang when she was dancing.我唱歌时她正在跳舞。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn9nZGHg3qjRbxcpbCeQk7Dd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"She danced as soon as I sang.我一唱歌，她就跳舞。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn7R7I1pQxMhebtZ70zwTbVe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"引导原因状语从句的从属连词主要有：because，for，as，since等。例句如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4ALH2rXBhCbfLxyRJ2q9oc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I study s go to the best school.因为我想上更好的学校，所以我才这么努力","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnZZudbpp1b7AOJtX4HLDrvd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"引导目的状语从句的从属连词主要有：in order that，so that，in case等。例句如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnNtRaJ4Vv5uKKBM85ZS8Hid"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I study so hard in order that I can go to the best school.我如此努力是为了能上更好的学校。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnZ2XyPb2NfO9wmu1WwtTgVq"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"引导结果状语从句的从属连词主要有：so that，so...that，such..that等。例句如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnz0RL2HuHfBmXZpbd29YVFb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I studied so hard that I went to the best school.我学习那么努力，所以我上了更好的学校。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnzFkfvrRcyWRslP4YNaR2wb"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"感叹词（int.）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniNo5Lt2yplNLe2agTxtUyd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"英语感叹词有：indeed、Ah、what、dear、well、now、there、man、boy。下图是我整理的一个总结性笔记。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnDvFxM9TJTIietGQn6RItMd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":603,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"感叹词（int.）","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/83ae9a1d84284fc687acae7ca3b68c7d","width":914},"text":"","id":"doxcn2mfJ14h5MQ1872rJaYD7ge"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"学习计划","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncOir01JItbm8zkBMQIFrMe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在我们熟悉了解音标和单词之后我们就可以为自己制定学习计划了。以下是我总结出的学习计划， *** 不一定适应每个人，但是希望会对大家有一个帮助。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnO6SyAUawTd0bOXmIEyq7Th"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"1.我们可以将5500个常见词汇分为30-50个Unit，每天背诵一个Unit（100-200个单词），一个月就可以完成一轮背诵，然后第二、三个月进行第二轮、三轮巩固复习。当然，每天早上背完一个新的Unit之后，我们需要在第30分钟、晚上、第2天、第4天、第7天、第15天及第30天、对每个单元进行及时重复复习。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnXZrxfyR3uLIJucYleZmfug"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"2.【具体 *** 】：早上：拿一张白纸挡住中文意思，只看英文单词开始背诵，勾出不认识的单词。背完一个Unit之后，立刻把勾出的单词再背一遍（依旧遮住中文意思），","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"如果还是有某个单词不认识","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"，就再打勾背诵；30分钟后：把勾出来的单词重新自测一遍；晚上：睡前把打了2次及以上勾的单词重新自测一遍。以此类推，反复记忆。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnW6zJRsNTiqwrslqkdVHGgf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"3.【注意要点】：一定要严格按照表格重复，不要偷懒！不要偷懒！不要偷懒！如果偷懒一次，漏下一两个单元，今天耽误了，那明天想补救就会很难。比如，你3月20号背诵了Unit 12，你不仅要在30分钟后和晚上睡觉之前复习两遍Unit 10，你还需要在背完Unit 12后同步复习之前背过的Unit 9、Unit 8、Unit 6、Unit 3。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnBOKtBWoGR6lvFb2PoVOtkG"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":623,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"学习计划","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/932ea040dbdd4751ac4bc6f9ae5ab66b","width":948},"text":"","id":"doxcnOFskaqaB9SjBk45NQep5oc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"作者在这边也分享一下自己学习单词的视频链接：","id":""},{"type":"external_link","attrs":{"url":"https://v.qq.com/x/page/u33089etcsv.html"},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"https://v.qq.com/x/page/u33089etcsv.html","id":""}],"text":"","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"，该视频里可以帮大家有效的学习到单词的读音，同时在视频中也教给大家如何利用学到的音标来进行拼读单词。如果有兴趣学习的小伙伴们可以跟着视频进行单词的学习。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnTCkkzyQZTOBUXECbvYv2Wf"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"APP推荐","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnK09UosVIi2YiwQHFV86yCd"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"百词斩","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnjHXslIAexQp0yTProWlEBg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"全民用的最多最火的背单词神器，下载量高达3亿，评分超级高。关键是适合不同年龄层次的人，可根据自己的身份选择不同的单词文本，有小学、初中、高中、大学、四六级、专业六级、八级，适合零基础的成年人从头开始学习。还有不同的背单词场景，根据不同的图片背诵单词，记忆效果很好，对零基础的成年人很友好。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0Ct***kPF3eTYq1eeCCgiUe"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":472,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"百词斩","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/fbfef7748a924c678b23b91155cd175d","width":705},"text":"","id":"doxcnerUpvZmVMFL415XQ3QSH6b"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"沪江开心词场","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnfmEVymN9J6brAtEO8nWtrb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"趣味性极强的背单词神器，成功解决了背单词枯燥无味的问题。这个APP更大的特点就是，在闯关的过程中，顺便把单词背诵了，轻松有趣，很适合成年人在上下班地铁上背诵。闯关的过程，也是检验你是否掌握单词的过程，不记住，闯不了关，让你干着急，激发你的闯关欲望。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYBcUZCaoSITDt6e3u8sKzf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":413,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"沪江开心词场","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/2144d956c812406e9adfa86e4cadc5e1","width":619},"text":"","id":"doxcnEIIrzeOWtYG6s4bZMYXaWv"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"扇贝单词","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnrBHwj7AdcE2gFJvFpXxaGi"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"不仅可以背单词，还可以做笔记。和其他APP不一样，这个软件背诵单词的速度飞快，不过还会有第二轮的检验，反复巩固，加强背诵效果。背诵之前，还会问你认不认识这个单词，如果不认识，出现的频率会更高。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnlePYP6B3qvZFrr1gHL6yKN"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":525,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"扇贝单词","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/69721704242f4e83a45f841440324b26","width":785},"text":"","id":"doxcnpaLd0wRL7VZ23gphHs0wph"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"语法","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCxFyqXKxXgSk6M6Ckw *** Ed"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"我们认识了单词之后，就可以来了解每个单词组成句子的语法问题。其实任何一门学科都是由浅入深的，英语也不例外。学习语法就像造房子，首先要把基础的语法脉络理清，打好根基，之后再慢慢补充和拓展，让知识巩固起来。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnPOeGocuMzPCdkNQBdmHxjg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"英语语法最基础的就是简单句的组成，之后我们才会慢慢了解到并列句、复合句以及从句，以下是我总结出的语法内容，我们一起来看看吧！","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn27kKkfooGNBXIP4Zxx3Z8b"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"简单句语法","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnaJy8VEpjdj6hlFLRREf2Dg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"所有的句子都是通过简单句而组合的，只不过句子的结构拓宽了一点， 词汇丰富了一点，从而演变为其他的长句。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnG1g4***QNGSLQaJhbNS2u4g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1.主谓","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmSsdyyIbBacwGufN9q1Ljy"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"主谓就是主语 + 谓语的组合，比如：Spring comes 。这句话中主语是spring ，谓语是 comes 。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnVkN3z1OEZX66FHA74jLG2g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"主语就是引领句子的开头部分，是一个句子的主体，英文是 subject ，我们用字母 S 代替。谓语可以理解为动词，英文是 verb，我们用字母 v 代替。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnvO6pufvGXZAnG9B5mCS8ub"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2.主谓宾","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmYsoQlFh2Vg4paDNGw6bcb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"根据字面的意思就是主语 + 谓语 + 宾语组合而成的句子，比如 ： I love you .","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnbtx9eCItlnoOZQkq3k1Fhh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"这句话中主语是 i ，谓语是 love ，宾语就是在谓语后面的词，这里是 you。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkROuofxsCDFtOur8IpHyDf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"宾语的英文是 object，这里用字母 o 代替。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniN76YN2qs3OiVRGSv0p6vc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3.主谓宾宾","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnThUEgQqMU70kOj1b4CSQYc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"主语 + 谓语 + 宾语+ 宾语的句子。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnLPqIHpvrh27HH092gOT4oh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"这里的两个宾语都是谓语动词所产生作用的。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnTeMZtDsE6ttx0Xrrd5vKaf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"比如 ：I give you money .","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2pcOY1lf9ggGINF9T1O4Jl"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"这里的 you 和 money 都是 give 的宾语，give you 和 give money ，所以都是两个宾语。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAdsX6Hwd12M5h5tvdR7Xec"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"4.主谓宾宾补","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnrTqqGQ2wNHk6kvbuvuXYze"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"主语 + 谓语 + 宾语+ 宾补的句子。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnvVbyOMLWBe5OLURd0FZCkg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"比如 ：It makes me happy .","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnpuev3tXTY45i7tAMXH8mgb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"这里的 me 是 make 的宾语，但是 happy 不是 make 的宾语。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnj1jiujWYbkApSgX8njYdne"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"happy 是 me 的形容词，是一个宾补，全称为宾语补足语，起到了补充说明的作用。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOtZhb7oXorBivpETAwnHZe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"注意 ：区分主谓宾宾和主谓宾宾补","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnsaXCewUaMSIFiUFYjKxYmf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"主谓宾宾中的两个宾语都是谓语所产生的作用词，而主谓宾宾补中宾补是宾语的形容词，与谓语没有任何关系。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAmzqMJ5W3shDYYdTBCzT9c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"5.主系表","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn9Os59ogFDKLfyxMiGdkhQf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"这里的系代表系动词。包含三个类别","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcntkh1Czp5EzORdX1aL4b58g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"A be 动词 ： am is are was were","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGjzv2rQWkZcH2gtgJiRAlf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"B 感官动词 （五官）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuGzjUgHpHLyfq1Y8Whafjh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"look 看起来","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnRQ6Kn3egji *** tvBYfllzoh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"sound 听起来","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAp44KkbWgO0whufxhMPhZe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"***ell 闻起来","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKQNBIRWNxwkBYHmzhHUIbc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"taste 尝起来","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSpGrlCfNd7fu5MjVZnGDwf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"feel 摸着....感觉......","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnDSnsqUOkpiOZRvKB717V6g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"C 变化动词","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnDnZOPCHrsiUvjgYYDQz36b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"become / turn / go / get / grow","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnxcK22Lfg7dOiKvh6iVIR4d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"这里的表是代表表语，包括名词、形容词、介宾短语、不定式todo","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnM0Qsi6sVQ1lQdVpdB4W43d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"比如 you are beautiful 这句话中，you 是主语，are 是系动词，beautiful 是表语。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnlu1gGIOyBcyiYk7G6zBcGh"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"并列句语法","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6K5WyFO9t3xyXzGmJumjCX"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"简单句通过不同的连接词就成为了不同的句子，通过并列词成了并列句，通过从属连词成了复合句。下面我们就一一讲解 ：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8bhZbi9IlyJd7r551DbNtc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"并列句：简单句+并列词+简单句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnJjw6p4uviFj384dseJb2Mb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"并列词一般有：and/or/but/so/while/yet/for/however，","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0xGsWUZkMHCckTkzzaOyxg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"1.表示并列：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn27j7rX5678xpGTJ0XuhVHb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"and，not only...but also...，neither...nor...","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnA7kLDR0jeB84Ofv04m7F8c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Her father is a doctor and her mother is a teacher .","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnxwbAhygM7A7FhOcX5wo6Zc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"2.表示选择：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6vbMtVlXLoc4s4eIC4Woew"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"or，or else，otherwise，either...or...","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcntPQounOFqkqGWKjY3fEsrb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Hurry or you won't make the train.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4zMWhhDgyStp6fn5cfqCpb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"3.表示对比、转折：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn7ovsvA1tEQCm4N4RYJQcAC"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"but，whileyet，however，never，","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCATnSoOHXbbw *** VBJAlE0c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I like tea while she likes coffee.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnX43vgUOKbiPPtlXexw5Owe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"4.表示原因：for","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyRCBm4cLabeGoN6z2KpT7b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I am thirsty , for it is hot .","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmnvydZUKe0g0rCgnLRIxnb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"复合句：简单句+从属连词+简单句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnZBqbcKAkuwKo4V3rdXDk1d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"从属连词有：that /wether/if。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcntFHd9a34MVmPvDKAMqvSFe"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"从句语法","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnJZqqCmGi3IQMLrakiBPIHc"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"名词性从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnLDUabdoQXotYo468TrAglf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"当名词性从句作为句子的不同成分时，又被称呼为不同的名字。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcndZm4Fot0gwpFTFEQXAQNNb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"当作为主语时，称为主语从句。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnRqtpDhC0iURGHaJkYhaIqh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"当称为宾语时，称为宾语从句，同样表语从句以及同位语从句。以下我们来举个栗子 ：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8rE1CL4XhBkcFSAn56SOnb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"主语从句 What she said is wrong .","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnu09Y7LyO4xluUx9FRZo86W"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"宾语从句 I said that she was wrong.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn3CnOkb1yIB3pvDNkpA8v1c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"表语从句 The fact is that he doesn’t really try.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnzc6fLFEeQjjreChZzbVCbe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"同位语从句 The news that he will come back is ture.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMkCHCX4gJvts46v5fbPDbg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"记住一点，不管什么从句，你把它当成一个”长一点的名词”。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnx6EcNa7gJXReAqxIDkUpth"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"那如果这个长名词在句子中作主语，就是主语从句，作宾语就是宾语从句。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnfoHRJCXnkKJ6KoWRA6963S"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"同位语从句就是相当于一个长点的名词对另外一个抽象名词进行解释说明。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnZGgiKPR3Hd49uDpmQAT2qi"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"定语从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnlLd9Lf8BZFw89envDMpwNe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"修饰限定名词，汉语中“的”前面的内容。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnk11n8EwFH0hxVcCfIoEhef"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"关系代词引导的定语从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGb18qxj1ZSpaHaTraL2Xfc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"1.who指人，在从句中做主语 Yesterday I helped an old man who lost his way.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn19AF8EqfjswU1uQ8fYqjpe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"2. whom指人，在定语从句中充当宾语，常可省略。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2isjftuM4vRySpCopRsxEe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Mr. Ling is just the boy whom I want to see","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnISuz5ChabNzCWx7W1RWh7c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"3. which指物，在定语从句中做主语或者宾语，做宾语时可省略","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyUxL7PkeYA5GpLALH2bQ5c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"This is the pen (which) he bought yesterday.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnFzUyHQf7gLI6JaNt6092lO"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"4. that指人时，相当于who 或者whom；指物时，相当于which。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmzr9vw3cdap0CSf5tPTXIb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"5. whose通常指人，也可指物，在定语从句中做定语。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoY8cakONmsdHcBCWAjZZRc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"指的是谁的。Do you like the book whose cover is yellow?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnlnHzXxRxNy1P6xsKAyt8Xd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"关系副词引导的定语从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnTyuo7WXgIOPuSRs5t31kNe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"when where why","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmOMggk4tuYr2Spl8l4HNsf"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"状语从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnetlithDV41CEd5qrnBOnSh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"修饰动作的发生的时间、地点、原因、方式。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcna99jgP4VRqKUDFCh1c0Vqf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"1.时间状语从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnK557GoXuRB0DepI9eUEKVg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"常用引导词：when, as, while, as soon as, before, after, since , till, until","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnY9A3WRHvEoZyRH4mgBxWBd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"特殊引导词：the minute, the moment, the second, every time, the day，the instant,","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnO9mpSScZPXVqMdMxTV5cig"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I was fat when I was a child.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUvKv5TzXCc7qPGjfkmXre6"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"2.地点状语从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnhrRk2C9ELJZJVRBRFS217b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"常用引导词：where","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnDPoCjDYcuHEdKpc5uTxNTb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"特殊引导词：wherever, anywhere, everywhere","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyse40io4DSVHmpndgooDRk"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Keep it where you can see it.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnBE3v8P8OvbFztN2CEJHyPc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"3.原因状语从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKgw4c1MB3hciTwGsIHjD1b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"常用引导词：because, since, as, for","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnpEIyogb586tuihCV0oW2jc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"特殊引导词：seeing that, now that, in that, considering that, given that.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGxscoAEJ5Hdr7z3X43MDxg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"My friends dislike me because I’m beautiful .","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnnTL2ta9nONJbiLE9UwMlwf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"4.目的状语从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSC7TsYeNceQ8DSYpw8Hy1c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"常用引导词：so that, in order that","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnDJovz1***H3hMLfu5A1gbX5"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"特殊引导词：lest, in case, for fear that，in the hope that, for the purpose that, to the end that","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnugOpDvFF16uZHkeI3takyc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"study hard so that you can pass the exam.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnX7o1MZIjrqwbKzgKqWMeMh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"5.结果状语从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6JgIgQ5oAdYmVRBnISWiLe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"常用引导词：so … that, so… that, such … that,","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncA6YkRxHow0L2KdBaFJeie"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"特殊引导词：such that, to the degree that, to the extent that, to such a degree that,","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnl56POCYiYeSN1q2fAHcBHd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"He got up so early that he caught the first bus.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnFD9lnwoLuipHftNbM8tYjd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"6.条件状语从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnNDWXvBCRyhkXuXxvbeG0hb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"常用引导词：if, unless,","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkzKtd2JK04n2D60buHq7lg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"特殊引导词：as/so long as, only if, providing/provided that, supposing that, in case that, on condition that","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnutMRwJ7rM6y457Wge0i2cd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"If you ask him, he will help you.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngjxiUiCjgdn5evgZ8yW83c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"7.方式状语从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn7IZWCwsvJeUciduGkyKwQf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"常用引导词：as, as if, how","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUbZEvewwKGK***xCq3G0PMc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"特殊引导词：the way","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnsILfEq5J7eJEWbkDTYFoAg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Think as i think","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqMqw1ImirgHb4SEhVuDbre"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"8.比较状语从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnfFrkpc1lo30QWxGEV4g4lh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"常用引导词：as(同级比较), than(不同程度的比较)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnRZZkeyqPct5gPPL7Sdpd0b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"特殊引导词：the more … the more … ; just as …， so…; A is to B what /as X is to Y; no … more than; not A so much as B","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnpqloCbQ0lWphQhi7W3WGUc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"The house is three times as big as ours.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnP43ykkHwBZZf28Z4XjsPxd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"9.让步状语从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnXexLVWzZYULCNnnhpaC0lE"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"常用引导词：though, although, even if, even though","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniGeI6QqkEmcEB87bc7QDZb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"特殊引导词： as(用在让步状语从句中必须要倒装)，while ( 一般用在句首 )，no matter …， in spite of the fact that, while, whatever, whoever, wherever, whenever, however, whichever","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcndam24WmxWEl6DGz8itqsJh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Though I believe it，yet I must consider.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQcBctl7G18X76WRBw0X8zf"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"时态、语态问题","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2ALi5xvrnpCECAT *** Yi8Aa"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"时态的本质是：时+态。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnL0RzBG8YNjomvF4EJnMoEe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"所以学习时态，一定要把时和态分开来看待。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUwbsFqf514uQDXAiB5xr4d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I am a teacher.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnjOHxFwdf9610xLo0S60HCe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"这句话，时间是“现在时”，状态是“一般态”","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6yMyrRRViyI6FfWaktCU4e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"英语里有4种时间：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcni0dp910IoQD9QmFJOdiTTc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"过去，现在，将来，过去将来","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcntjdIrt1MCv88xMT18trxIf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"英语里有4种状态：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2p5k90Evt9vdcUYpzv3bDg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"一般态：非完成，非进行","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnnyPmiDBiluGbbx0fQvIp4e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"进行态：动作的延续","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniK7Iyckr6AJ5NBxfqhXN2d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"完成态：在截止时间时，完成了的事情","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0Oo93t06MB5iqyom10fpdc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"完成进行态(几乎不用)：过去是，到截止时间是，将来还是的事情(强调截止时间)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyJHMdd3b1btfA2I4bBvfXe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如下图，两个是我整理的笔记内容。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnJUPWwnm2bwJkrv0Z3F3nab"},{"type":"imageList","children":[{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":424,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"时态、语态问题","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/2dc0dab104834b4bb1f7d53a2f7a46c1","width":655},"text":"","id":"doxcnacTHReq9vY7EdPLRySxNuR"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":468,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"时态、语态问题","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/c756989bbd1044669a5be67dcca136ab","width":732},"text":"","id":"doxcnjvcu0bJIHneLs2da29o5sf"}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwgE16aKvniXgn02YKIuAgg"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"学习计划","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwgE16aKvniXgn02YKIuAgg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"1.从阅读时理解语法，再用语法书夯实理解而成的专业知识。举一个典型的例子。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"冠词the看似简单","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"，实际上用法难懂变化多端。一本详细的语法书通常会记录数十条应用the的规则，及其不计其数的不可抗力事件，并且除外中依然存在除外。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn13CYDTYmGFMYhO4Z0G0K6e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"2.学精语法，英语语感比规则关键。培养阅读英文的好习惯。仍以the为例。每一次读书的时候难免会遇到the字数十次，而每次都是看到不同情况，不同类型的句型。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnO7utA8kzs7fho4Rnuqhshx"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"3.读书时碰到疑惑，前去阅览语法书。这时候，语法书里的复杂规则就恰好派上用场了。由于你明白自己要请，都知道这种语法规则用于具体的语句。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCuAo8ooj0JDnIeeXJC9rqd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":600,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"学习计划","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/d20390155029456ba85d3be1b02f7dcb","width":900},"text":"","id":"doxcnIxTn5tMBhHbk6etfGhoFQb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWRAe34frk1DPhorGHasOYe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"以下几个图片是我在网上进行搜索归纳的总结性笔记，一列为一种总结内容，图一至图四为整体内容，图二衔接图一结尾，图三衔接图二结尾，图四衔接图三结尾。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnHM7jS22SIvOiOR7gesRIJb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"图一","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCYGhPQ8DSRSQ7k8bVkAmbb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1156,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"学习计划","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/9695cee9acd141eeb4f9542e91566552","width":1623},"text":"","id":"doxcnhOznOxYYndRfHlBebxV8If"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"图二","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnzrImd5S33fFzYkuLMB1Thc"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1106,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"学习计划","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/b4e7741267af4905a893bab3415491a3","width":1625},"text":"","id":"doxcnBVLTykjbKK4Ic2SInpWwvq"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"图三","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnjChnYpwrYqwW8VTRNwVhys"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1138,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"学习计划","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/9e2e930112d64db68cb988a6985bfe6f","width":1623},"text":"","id":"doxcnZ4IPuwd5kjKsPoKgyWNVqf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"图四","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMAzKKhpUpF***KdoFngg9uj"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":909,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"学习计划","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/beb01fb9ec8049cd924ed826b6db69d5","width":1624},"text":"","id":"doxcnC8K6ks6ssQhrZE1BIokaSd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"给大家讲了这么多书面上的语法问题，作者在这里给学习英语的小伙伴们介绍一下我在学习英语时候借鉴的视频。视频中老师充分讲解了初步学习英语适用的语法问题，在讲解的同时还为大家用例句进行了说明。视频链接如下：","id":""},{"type":"external_link","attrs":{"url":"https://www.bilibili.com/video/av934142897/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b"},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"https://www.bilibili.com/video/av934142897/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b","id":""}],"text":"","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCMgGOx32f12plxMYnR8Sdn"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"推荐书籍","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnttxR0Tfpm1yJbn7S4UNEPc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"《英语魔法师之语法俱乐部》","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnVgJWo7kmf56Z05lOQ9Y1gb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"本书内容非常简单，可以帮助语法薄弱的学习者慢慢理解语法。它分为三个部分：初级句型、中级句型和高级句型。初级句型共讲解了五种基本句型；中级句型有四种，即形容词从句、名词从句、状语从句和倒装句。另外这本书的冠词、不定式和动名词的语法相比其他语法书的讲解更透彻。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOIgcKtZmYbC4WxA1uvXhTc"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":637,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"推荐书籍","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/a455616550e34d90afd72c7fb6375029","width":960},"text":"","id":"doxcnHlZtGWMWCnWcSJaS7G4qkd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"《English Grammar in Use》","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnTFM7ROj *** xghbsJPkGrCbd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"本书的语法范例，主要是以情景为例，将抽象的语法概念更具体化、也易于理解。书中材料均来自英语母语国家，表达地道，让学习者可以学以致用，让学习的效率更好。全书图文并茂，内容生动，对语法知识点进行分类对比，可以让学习者快速梳理思路，学习起来事半功倍。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnZIILWbHHkQuGmi4aBZ9Ufe"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":526,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"推荐书籍","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/b2c42c5de9ce4434ae8f984e64a7088a","width":789},"text":"","id":"doxcnT1MSFjFggedQUbMWRQ1dDc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"《柯林斯英语语法》","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKGu8LJqVqDUPil6fnZxXxh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"《柯林斯英语语法》的体例和所有的英语语法书都不一样，不是按照句型排列的，而是按照表达法和表达功能排列的，而内容也侧重于灵活实用的功能语法讲解，强调语法和词汇的结合。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnzaz1Rtt5HB4TM8DwO808je"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":686,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"推荐书籍","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/30982e4142d548c4968007b96f2e4ace","width":1027},"text":"","id":"doxcnqES1yHBd0cMdKAa5i1hBWc"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"句子","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnn0nGWZYIAYYa18gNM31Wff"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"通过了单词和语法的认识，持之以恒记忆对话、课文中的佳句是丰富我们语言，积累句式的好 *** 。而能对熟悉的句子进行变通也是学习英语的重要技巧之一。现在虽然考试不考句型转换，但是句型转换可以加深我们的记忆和知识的拓展。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"（想详细了解英语造句内容的可以在该视频链接中跟着老师一块学习和认识英语基础","id":""},{"type":"external_link","attrs":{"url":"https://www.bilibili.com/video/av763971245/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b"},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"https://www.bilibili.com/video/av763971245/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b","id":""}],"text":"","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnXMDWrzox2UdAqyFCO3eNgd"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"句子成分","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnM73tNQ9AXsi2zaT4N8OvAg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"句子的组成部分，包括主语、谓语、宾语、定语、状语、表语、补语、同位语和独立成分9种，其中，主语和谓语是主要成分有，表语、宾语、定语、状语、补足语、同位语和独立成分是次要成分。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkhxsoXgRJo4rro7rLtpDjc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、主语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnY5BM1z3Yjy6Ujzvc0hYCnc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"主语是句子叙述的主体，可由名词、代词、数词、名词化的形容词、不定式、动名词和主语从句等来承担。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnS0s7KZQb6YMEZ1DaX3uaWg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"The sun rises in the east. (名词)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcny6JIEUIEvJh9eyVh8mR8ah"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"He likes dancing. (代词)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnLoN8qoA6jOuwdEIgwexjmc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、谓语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncIHCil4IIPTW55ckct5QDc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"谓语说明主语所发出的动作或具有的特征和状态。谓语由动词来承担。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnrQS8YKWUYuTCNnIjiobeMe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"We often speak English in class.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn3HaNT5GpxU81Uv8iAVBKgg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、宾语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2cRy3khvk0MCLzFM23VXXf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"宾语是动作的对象或承受者，常位于及物动词或介词后面。宾语可由名词、代词、数词、名词化的形容词、不定式、动名词、宾语从句等来担任。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn3VHOgsEAtOXmk2KX4Fwcbb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"除少数句子（如祈使句和感叹句等）外，一句话必须同时具有主语和谓语所表达的意思才能完整。主语是针对谓语而言的，是一句话的主题，谓语用来说明主语的情况，为主语提供信息。例如：They are working.主语是they(他们)，那么他们在做什么呢？看来没有谓语are working 是不行的。在正常情况下，英语的主语和谓语的位置与汉语一致，也就是说主语在前，谓语紧跟其后。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmzCGQVlui4dthWYjWX9XYd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"He pretended not to see me. (不定式短语)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnFvgKUJPmOIylvs138Utvyh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"I enjoy listening to popular music. (动名词短语)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniWGjGM3HER20HF4mawNmyh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"四、定语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnugXIexeJ5aLiGIrYBJFAhd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"定语用于描述名词,代词,短语或从句的性质,特征范围等情况的词叫做定语,定语可以由名词,形容词和起名词和形容词作用的词,短语担任。如果定语是单个词,定语放在被修饰词的前面,如果是词组,定语放在被修饰词的后面。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnvYOixbx0BYHx66pGNn0sjd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Guilin is a beautiful city. (形容词)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYdvIN7Khzk0f3rVjkgcJEH"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"China is a developing country; America is a developed country. (分词)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAaaWG7VikQJdMEg4IN4djd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"五、状语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYXLZriQiPslgZmDPhT8Zse"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"状语说明事情发生的时间,地点,原因,目的,结果方式,条件或伴随情况,程度等情况的词叫状语。状语一般由副词、介词短语、分词和分词短语、不定式或相当于副词的词或短语来担当。其位置一般放在句末，但也可放在句首或句中，修饰动词、形容词、副词等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnev42QgmX28dduOgV46GdKc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Light travels most quickly. (副词及副词性词组)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIRCImB7FIwJ26I2qfFmHbg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"He has lived in the city for ten years. (介词短语)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnbijUYPOyzMS4BDHufAQAph"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"六、补语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnpZly8E7GCl1mKApuWPZjyc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"补语的作用对象是主语和宾语,具有鲜明的定语性描写或限制性功能,在句法上是不可或缺的。补语是起补充说明作用的成份。最常见的是宾语补足语。名词、动名词、形容词、副词、不定式、现在分词、过去分词都可以在句子中作宾补。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnZdDpX7V2RszuRXLVpS6e2c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"His father named him Dongming. (名词)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnRjdSvxsVQUbv***8jzZdWfc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"They painted their boat white. (形容词)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyKE *** uQc9YccxX5a5itOjf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"七、表语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnANZ6TfZoCI37m2KoXON5yh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"表语是用来说明主语的性质,身份,特征和状态。表语须和系动词一起构成句子的复合谓语。表语一般放在系动词之后。表语可以由名词,形容词或起名词和形容词作用的词和短语担任。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnaHnDxNnj08Ff7UpCLb29og"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"常见的系动词有: be, sound(听起来), look(看起来), feel(摸起来), ***ell(闻起来), taste(尝、吃起来), remain(保持，仍是), feel(感觉)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkYVDBK7YbzuMDpjzRRmeug"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"八、同位语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnl039rxzRXbLkHRViJ6Lieh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"同位语当两个指同一事物的句子成分放在同等位置时，一个句子成分可被用来说明或解释另一个句子成分，前者就叫做后者的同位语.这两个句子成分多由名词（代词）担任，同位语通常皆放在其说明的名词（代词）之后。同位语和补语的区别在于：补语不能缺少，同位语可以缺少。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4gmNyprrTgWRQHv5N04obc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"九、独立成分","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQXXdZhlyzzPKr1t1GtP1Pd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"独立成分，是当一个词、短语或从句用在句子里面，与句子的其他成分只有意义上的联系而没有语法关系时，它就称为独立成分。常见的独立成份有呼吁、惊叹语、答语、插入语、介词短语、非谓语动词所构成的短语及形容词、副词所引起的词组等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoWr4o2ODMQotKBHk6wbq2d"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"陈述句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyq0bIM74F6EZYYWy6hh9Lf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"陈述句是陈述一个事实或者说话人的看法。它包括肯定句和否定句两种。陈述句在书写时句末用句号，而在朗读时则用降调。陈述句的核心是非常基础的。这个句子里有一个名词和一个动词。句子可以有其他成分，如形容词、副词和其他词。但是最简单的形式就是名词和动词。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnVp3pyjHZ1o89Y***OU2Rl1g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"陈述句的基本句型：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMYXr3LzD0cFkj0FEkjmCkd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(1)主语+连系动词+表语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnX0gKKGtyQCL6opKZMCXr8f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(2)主语+谓语(不及物动词)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnfH6bkRz1iIZ2t9vIiRRksc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(3)主语+谓语(及物动词) +宾语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnlczsezkRhMsHzPd8Aoxw5f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(4)主语+谓语(及物动词) +间接宾语+直接宾语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnO3dv72R3uS9wNNc4wWTfRg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"(5)主语+谓语(及物动词) V.+宾语+宾语补足语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnt33KmVGc4GesAK1fzdyPoc"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"肯定句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnlfQ75ODhofVvrUVDmON8Ke"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"The river flooded.河水泛滥了。(主谓 )","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnofCMsXnZ6ev4xSdNSFKB7e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"He has a sense of humor.他有幽默感。(主谓滨)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn1JQPc3MfxW8gdDfMKB9o2b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"He can teach you English.他可以教你英语。(主谓+双宾)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnW7HEZOK2x8ZiecRJsc57Ne"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"He painted the desk blue.他把书桌涂成了色。(主谓滨宾补)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmNsaB5AOmqF0MeT3Gt1g4p"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"He is a doctor.他是一名医生。(主系表)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneriwUiAI3OWrkNNs7Vko2f"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"否定句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnBaGQt354***BKzsNPqz8QPh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"The river did not/didn't flood. 河水没有泛滥。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIkNL2yZvzT6t***hAPi5e2W"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"He does not/doesn't have (has not 1 hasn't) a sense of humor.他没有幽默感。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnhjiSTi0GZyouew9DMRbqdb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"He can not/can't teach you English. 他不能教你英语。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnrYqJGDjdXDMokXmGMWV2Ke"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"He didn't paint the desk blue.他没有把书桌涂成蓝色。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnpLAdCk3F0udFVjhRORcgOe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"He is not/ He's not/ He isn't a doctor.他不是一 名医生。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYFKGig5anbAJhpwdGUMTLg"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"疑问句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnD0TdW6iWNi2rgvbWNuzH7e"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"一般疑问句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnz3fWdWu6dYRJAs9BxHfadk"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"通常用来询问一件事情或一种情况是否属实，其回答通常是yes或no，因此这类问句又叫做“是非问句”。下面是句型。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoMTLxBXUg63m3YB4BAH6Rc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Is there something wrong with this machine?这台机器有问题吗?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYCf98jmmG9fLEdUvfZVlah"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Have you got today's milk?你拿到今天的牛奶了吗? ","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnACDsS2X0n9rKX8aXhpTLhh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Shall we go on?我们继续向前吗?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnbqUsTz9bHHcli9fZLe0hCd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Will he not agree with you?他不同意你吗?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmtQG7lHPJZoHr9K75hJLdD"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Haven't you any sisters?你没有姐妹吗?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnN2idvuqJtvtl2N96wP6y0g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Don't you like this movie?你不喜欢这部电影吗?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSf5mWamlbnO53a40lF6cff"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"特殊疑问句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnDxYuR4fYrM7rJvKsRvjjgd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"特殊疑问句是对句中的某一部分提出疑问，通常以who、where、when、why等疑问词开头，因此又叫“wh-问句”。下面是句型。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcntFPlTuXGpUYJ7nfxRLkZGb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Who are you?你是谁?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6lEONTnSd6DbEMe3y6m3WE"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Whom are you going to play table tennis this afternoon?今天下午你和谁打乒乓球?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncRRlEvQuNPcIfJ4b9KTgtg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Whose glasses are broken?谁的眼镜打碎了?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnI5whj7J8WXAjeV78zhsEQc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Which shoes do you like?你喜欢哪双鞋子?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnnpmOZr3KXytK5usOnhuMEd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"What do they want to do?他们想要做什么?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnvU1DTLJ2kVkIvLFK3XHXbe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"When does she want to practice?她想要什么时候练习?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnrZc7rs7NKiryQIvDUgKrmd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Where is the restroom?洗手间在哪里?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnttbEBfqQfomY4G0xYgEINf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Why did you leave?你为什么离开了 ?|","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2mYEg4oMjgBf2EE0Zw21Tb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"How do you study English?你怎么学习英语?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnhoVGbbUloIx3LKFX4PVNTg"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"选择疑问句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnlpZWiDpowGm0csSHzFxQZg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"选择疑问句是对问题提出两个或两个以上的答案供对方选择的疑问方式。下面是句型。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn967odvYj0RR5keeNO5U9de"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Shall we go by bus or by train?我们乘汽车还是乘秋车?，","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnr5r1RLK5BR9dYpFudVzS5c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Shall I give you a hand, or you can manage?要我帮你,还是你自己解决?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnL0B5kOAnR8vaHJVjqa5pWe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Which do you prefer, coffee or tea?你要哪一样, 咖啡还是茶?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGpSTLACZXguAekYDOYoWAj"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Coffee or tea?咖啡还是茶?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4Mjip9XpYZGdBhatcrF3ue"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Which do you lie best, singing, dancing or skating?唱歌、 跳舞和溜冰，你最喜欢哪样?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIGlJ6JDtSLXz10dPpfwdtc"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"反义疑问句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0kRglqChzA8pZK9AstF7fc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"反意疑问句又称为附加疑问句，英语称为tag question，是一种常用于口语的疑问句式，主要由“陈述句(或祈使句) + 疑问句”构成。下面是句型。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnE *** tziIk0a9RZB63oo5hcv"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"陈述句有 be 动词时，以该be动词形成反问；陈述句有助动词（will、shall、can、have...）时，以该助动词形成反问；陈述句只有动词时，按主语人称及该动词时态，置 do、does、did 形成反问。下面是句型。下面是句型。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnRCl1Pd9EzwAyzCzQYOZvXa"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Study hard, will you?要用功，好不好?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnufZ5wiE0UF5m3sJqsJamQc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Don't do it, will you?不要做这件事，好不好?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnZXfFQ996Cadw2LlEQLAGUb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Let me go, will you?让我走，好不好?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcne2RXcPwowdoD5Hdw***gLLh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Let's stop here, shall we?我们在这里停下，好吗?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnU02 *** 6JNcnL73C1lpiadyF"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"There is wifi at this cafe, isn't there?在这个咖啡厅有无线 *** ，对吗?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnvdI6BMTcZj0Fao6JnlqZkf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"The clock is slow, isn't it?表走得慢，对吗?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnzNxN0fYWeCjWho80EOwhpf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"Your are good at math, aren't you?你擅长数学,对吗?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuIUoXgdL9z4qpX3vwkpswd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"John is going to study English, isn't he? John会学习英文,对吗?","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSJtc2x7GlFKrBHLCpT6I7f"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"祈使句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUlMxrzw1ADWZOX2RwRsTqh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"祈使句是英语中的一个句式，也是用于表达命令、请求、劝告、警告、禁止等的句子。祈使句最常用于表达命令，因此在学校文法中也常称为命令句。下图是归纳的总结性笔记。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8yexivfY5nXi70BEvxOObb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":553,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"祈使句","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/4c03a42953f0478a8235a64272e9d131","width":915},"text":"","id":"doxcnHeINouDJUcRgghMw6TWLvb"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"感叹句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnpwIVxv1aU51hkxjvqT2syg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"感叹句是英语四大功能句型之一，主要用来表示高兴、愤怒、厌恶或者欣赏等强烈感情的句子，句末通常用感叹号！结尾，说话时用降调。下图是归纳的总结性笔记。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnowqJgF7c9vAXFKGWl4alfc"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":701,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"感叹句","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/c45f9ca9b5db492c816bf334a39817ce","width":1079},"text":"","id":"doxcnxzaNej89cvkmYGGT1yNeMz"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"简单句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8hpxbXoQZw8QBNE5bKPCXe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"由一个主语（并列主语）和一个谓语（并列谓语）构成。只有一套主谓结构。主语可理解为“谁？”，谓语视为“做什么？”“是什么？”。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn22RGQBMXTyQY141ic8wQLg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"简单句五种基本句型：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnseRcAD6RspymnAePU59pgd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"主系表 SVP","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnpUiYrLpMY9vOTF0BaQX2P4"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"主谓SV","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngnNsOmd7jHEFxkQAC8PwGW"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"主谓宾SVO","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnjPv65QbjbcC7O7TafsNehg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"主谓双宾SVOO","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnh6CbV42IgCVBYh3hWCdo2g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"主谓宾宾补SVOC","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYXGOWIRYZCqnbTGiRHVjdg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"下图是归纳的总结性笔记。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnVfhjECy4SPLEoEmmovQ7ad"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":366,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"简单句","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/209ed9c279194d449c04709817ce01ad","width":552},"text":"","id":"doxcnWtKiWieERz8SIrKGYo0kof"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"并列句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnvK1dZSJ9beTgUSAZ764Fif"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"是并列句由两个或者两个以上的简单句并列而成，有两套或两套以上的主谓结构。并列句的基本句型：“分句+并列连词/特殊符号+分句”。并列连词：and(和，而且) but(但是) yet (但是) for (因为) so (所以)。下图是归纳的总结性笔记。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnevPcYXZIbS14HlLwjdzi4e"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":555,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"并列句","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/509a2fb7d8314abc82c8e092d40111e8","width":890},"text":"","id":"doxcniKNFBENGpNchVaL0zXqWzb"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"特殊句式","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnJqFcNuCUWaiEYYcscGJAyn"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"存在句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnthBrV1bxnITixNJEHXVfPg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"存在句在","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"英语","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"中是用来表示人或事物的存在、出现等意义，而且大都是用于描述性文章中。存在句可以从结构，句型来分析，可以有多种时态形式。相关的语法重点有：存在句的谓语动词，存在句非限定形式，存在句主谓一致等。下图是归纳的总结性笔记。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnw8u6iz34h3LpTMSN7jupDf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":437,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"存在句","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/73afbf7743cf404ba512639eae92f403","width":684},"text":"","id":"doxcnGPMzTRHTrd4vGWFfGTSUGe"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"省略句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnrte54LEyfxQTHQm5RvlrSd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在英语中，名词可以省略，动词可以省略，动词当中不但系动词这样的可以省略，连实意动词也是可以省略的，只要它已经出现过了。会使用省略句是英语水平走向高阶的一个标志，在使用省略句的时候，不要担心对方看不懂或者听不懂。只要你用的正确，不存在别人不能理解。下图是归纳的总结性笔记。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkMcL8HKVuxNaXyPpt28Efe"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":416,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"省略句","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/7db2fd9c00fd480eb7e4326e50c9f033","width":671},"text":"","id":"doxcnSZ6iUEtW58RMKnedHkF4ig"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"倒装句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnxlJiYoDl36mUGAHR6HQM1d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"为了强调、突出等词语的目的而颠倒原有","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"语序","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"的","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"句式","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"叫做倒装句。在倒装句中，颠倒了的成分可以恢复原位而句意基本不变，句法成分不变。英语倒装句的7种形式，希望能帮助你理解英语句子。下图是归纳的总结性笔记。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuySu7eg6Dix9u0iXEgQx0c"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":524,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"倒装句","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/d0fc7aa9c8734ea6b4ee294e99c3dc7a","width":719},"text":"","id":"doxcnvyO2dKHfKIEnF60fdAK4Se"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"强调句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnvQk7sQmCrcRMdHiqlMykXe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"强调句型是一种特殊句式，用于表示说话者强烈的感情或意愿。强调就是通过某种手段使句中某一部分所包含的信息比一般情况下显得更重要。强调句型的结构如图所示：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnm0i33Lp9pAuWCC4Sz5ZD9e"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":740,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"强调句","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/b91cf42bfeac4f219b734bce59b8836c","width":1153},"text":"","id":"doxcncxZueckJE2V9unMRc11e6b"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"学习计划","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn7THJYFgeUAP738ZX2HMeCR"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"【之一步】：看大标题，图片，小标题，看完之后大概猜测文章是关于什么的，目的在于对文章有个模糊的印象。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnhKhRjn3qXjfJVQjrN5quWc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"【第二步】：重点略读，主要读每段之一句和最后一句，大概了解每个段的内容，目的在于对文章结构有个整体把握，比如典型的结构——介绍问题、给出原因、提出解决 *** 、说明潜在风险、对未来进行判断。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn5O2dw1bWolFjkW38mCgPz9"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"【第三步】：全文略读，读的时候让尽可能多的信息进入眼眶，略读次要信息，抓重点信息(核心观点、重要前提、重要假设)，并对重点信息进行精读，同时对觉得不错的内容再进行标记。目的在于掌握重点信息，方面以后复查或者积累写作素材。(这时候不懂的单词可以圈起来，只要不影响文章大意理解就不查，等到最后一步再查)","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniHEGSXYT2nxppKRBWZ45Jf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"【第四步】：不断来回查找信息，对比是否存在疏漏，目的在于梳理文章结构，掌握文章整体脉络。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnDhhkkvtV8rRvNC7bsza23b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"【第五步】：带着结构重新略读阅读信息，精读标记信息，看是否理解清楚，是否需要进一步的查询工作。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnDwn7yFvE5euPKdiyVuR5Nb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"学习计划制定好后，作者这边推荐小伙伴们可以在b站上跟着这位老师学习学习，他的视频内容充分的为大家解决了句型问题，同时还利用造句的方式帮助小伙伴们可以更加深刻的了解英语句子的组成部分，视频链接如下：","id":""},{"type":"external_link","attrs":{"url":"https://www.bilibili.com/video/av763971245/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b"},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"https://www.bilibili.com/video/av763971245/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b","id":""}],"text":"","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnX1Lyz1eF3mUpTa7q8yvaih"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"阅读外文文章","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnclB8F8RfjWQS1ZGaTmk5ff"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"《读者文摘》","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoJdmQYzbm4zf4ejQOqXtFd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"读者文摘在全球多个国家和地区都有发行。1922年","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"创刊","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"，这是一本能引起大众广泛兴趣的内容丰富的家庭杂志。它所涉及的故事文章涵盖了健康、生态、 *** 、国际事务、体育、旅游、科学、商业、教育以及幽默笑话等多个领域。适用人群是英语初、中级水平学习者及考研党","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwqhJKJCHzbYd2LwLLxaw1g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"同时，由于内容具有思考价值、探讨性和实用性，中国英语考试中有不少题目和材料来源于这本杂志。非常适合考试党提高英语能力和语感，是夯实英语基础的大众型读物。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnJblhctnFwrFB9szmOPAYoe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"购买方式：直接联系中图订购纸本，这种刊物在国内订阅是完全许可的。都是英文原版，按期引进。读者文摘是那种小册子，时代是标准的杂志。现在国家对外籍刊物进口管理比较严格，自己从网上订电子版往往会被屏蔽掉。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAg6lna6AEISLMHnMWaPlwg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":700,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"阅读外文文章","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/ed45d9432f6d48038eaf53b1b50fd0b0","width":1050},"text":"","id":"doxcn7BHlMZEgR0Bfxl0wKN106c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"《","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"经济学人","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"》","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn5qVgfWzE8N3RdjJLxGYUKd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"这是一份由伦敦经济学人报纸有限公司出版的杂志，创办于1843年9月，创办人詹姆士·威尔逊。杂志的大多数文章写得机智，幽默，有力度，严肃又不失诙谐，并且注重于如何在最小的篇幅内告诉读者最多的信息。该杂志又以发明巨无霸指数闻名，是社会精英必不可少的读物。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmzM2fPOheGGYJCa8pAJv8e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"里面的文章十分经典，经常出现在考研的阅读理解里面，可见里面的用词、用句的高水平。还有很重要的一点，就是《经济学人》里面还会涉及大量的词汇、固定搭配以及长难句，不仅仅是提升阅读水平，对于词汇积累、语法提升等都大有好处。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKeyyDDxNWtjPCOgp5h8LXd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"就里面所有的板块和内容而言，个人最喜欢其中的 ","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"obituary","id":""},{"type":"text","text":" 和 special report 部分，前者会写很多有趣的人，很有意思。后者则涉及政治、经济、社会、科技领域的时新专题报道，属于涨知识的必备栏目。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnU2lGZISzbtOQJ0hgF9ht9f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"阅读方式：一些免费提供离线资源的网站，这块要用谷歌搜，或者用必应国际版，但很多更新更新着就不更新了，免费的可以搜一个关键词：西贝博客。还有国内一些网站提供付费的离线资源，这块是一种选择，只要会用指令搜索，就可以搜索进行查看。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnBDBhwGuTF6Y9q0K8UZgFWf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"还有就是通过发邮件到经济学人官方，咨询他们有哪些授权渠道商，再通过这些渠道商去订阅。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneDYgFa6dIluIcKzeAknWhd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":663,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"阅读外文文章","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/a6c09a1dd0b64fc58b21d0d3a96ef076","width":973},"text":"","id":"doxcn8jxBuGxQxPmQXTyuRKzfde"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"英语中期学习","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnZt8uMGUPRo8V8im591dVif"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"听力","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnK0epC41eglSTzsosGbIavh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"我们在锻炼听力的时候一定不要听那些东拼西凑的英语磁带，而是选择一个听力材料就彻底把它拿下。材料里的每一个单词、每一个短语都要听清楚。为了达到这一点，你必须听写。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn9XUbwIIzg8oDX83HZyXKxe"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":300,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"听力","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/fa24511943ad423e9bed1e34a320dde5","width":452},"text":"","id":"doxcnKv48CpMJjLajyYXc0pouae"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"明确学习任务","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnzMd0ooJutFMUz0OZqeCwqd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"之一步是先纠正自己的音标，这是最基础的，我们之所以听不懂是因为我们发音不标准，我们也听不出来英语发音。所以首先必须纠正好自己的音标。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEdM2LsfAKWR6HNHVmhg2gc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"第二步是要扩大自己的单词量，好多人不注意这一点，认为听力的单词量有限，但是一定要把自己的单词量扩大到一定的范围。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnhNSI81bh6GMHiZw0Uvx2xd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"第三步是训练听力，首先训练单个单词，先听单个单词，然后在逐渐的听句子，这是很主要的，要循序渐进。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn3yasqt8PVyvdfJ1Hj4oFpd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"第四步是在听听力的时候，一定要在自己听不懂的地方多听几遍，并把相关的单词和句子抄下来，经常去阅读。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnreD2PtoRVzFOjkk7tAasUc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"第五步是每天坚持听听力至少2个小时，这是非常关键的一步，不要怕辛苦，坚持下来就行。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnPkUHlTFddlEBYsC3MgrCIc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"第六步是可以坚持看美剧或者坚持听外国的音乐和相关的歌曲，对自己的听力都有很大的帮助。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnx3R4068GWCDbQifRgcWJPg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"听力的基础练习可以在b站上搜索","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"发音词典","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"（这是用户）进行用于听力练习，这个老师的视频中开头部分就为大家制定好了听力规则，在观看视频的时候也可以充分的锻炼自己的英语听力。视频的链接如下：","id":""},{"type":"external_link","attrs":{"url":"https://www.bilibili.com/video/BV1ZY411N7jx/?spm_id_from=333.337.search-card.all.click\u0026vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b"},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"https://www.bilibili.com/video/BV1ZY411N7jx/?spm_id_from=333.337.search-card.all.click\u0026vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b","id":""}],"text":"","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8FVl4pJ2vSGrePfW1MGvce"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"学习小技巧","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkN1wpXb0j2dCuwdq84efWc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"1、学会抓关键词","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0EqyWTvUywCro4XBoYxNwf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在听力过程中，我们要学会抓其中的关键词。在语段之间的停顿时间，快速浏览选项，对比其不同之处，在听的过程中通过关键词判断说话者的身份，帮助自己搜索相关背景知识。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnydSflSO3XiLXE3DbacpQmf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"2、学会划分意群","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn5TJgyVHqlUnLeWhL7TiXve"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"很多人在听的时候都是逐个单词地听，想要听懂每一个单词。其实这样做是没有必要的，也是很难做到的。因此，我们要学会划分意群来听，分词组分词块来听会帮助你节省很多时间，并能让你更快地理解句子是什么意思。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn7h0dyChjbb7sCui3hA6GOd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"3、学会提前思考","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQspMHU3xk0sDWGGXNVlPmc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在听力开始之前，你就要浏览完材料，结合选项开始思考。这段话要讲什么，目的又是什么。并学会猜测，包括对话题的预测、甚至通过常识进行答案的预测。这样才能在考试之中处于主动的位置，所以，听听力要积极主动。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn3ClKnJ9e1gQZcjtwET6MBf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"4、学会做笔记","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUE0RmQjdnQTdu1LPmsSOee"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"好的笔记能够让你的思路清晰，让你了解听力内容的结构。在听力的开头结尾时就要集中精神，记住相关信息，因为那很有可能就是听力的重点。有时考点在出题时是按照顺序来出的，因此笔记能帮助我们排除一些干扰选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMXGUhlbc57***PMlRspWP9d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"5、学会注意数字","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnZTIPpQBWtOnyymvmy64sgd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"要注意以下几方面：常规数字的连读，百分数，分数，小数，百分比， *** 号码，航班号，驾照号，信用***等等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnrsFTyiPi7cEpejGRDc0bPb"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"推荐学习网站","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCif7BdZShCkdR6zlvkAGhb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"BBC Learning English","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneQ6fzjxKQxaSONRpBG7zBe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"我一定要把它放在之一位，因为只要想到网路上的免费英文学习资源，之一个要推荐的绝对是BBC Learning English。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyt4VyHUNlepoNZrZcjnwpd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"这个被公认为全球更佳的英文学习网站，不只具有英文单字词汇、文法、发音、听力、会话、阅读以及学习测验等丰富多元的学习教材，而且也一直持续更新教学内容。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqApD00g0lOexyWgq0ZOQGc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"除了可以用网路学习之外，也可以免费下载mp3语音和文字稿到电脑，当作持续自学进修练习的免费教材。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnfOLXyRgbV7xNPhKMpDSVne"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":448,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"推荐学习网站","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/e913fb04c2264cf988f77a15dfd0d31a","width":687},"text":"","id":"doxcnjIQ***QiGBRrao7JobdIF1d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"TED","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneYelIUmcvEwovBCnWOA4jg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"TED Talks是可以一边听演讲一边训练英文听力的网站。在这里有不同领域的专业人士所发表的科学、娱乐、文化、教育、艺术等等专题英文演讲影片，除了训练正式英文的听力之外，还可以增长知识，开拓自己的视野。可以观看约10~20分钟TED Talks练习英文听力，听不懂时，还可阅读演讲稿理解影片内容。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUta5inyr6K3SDQvaSC2G2e"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":799,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"推荐学习网站","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/d2002cfa50c14029b7f00abac5e79b4e","width":1201},"text":"","id":"doxcnWUlwAtqF05xze1WKEyJ69d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"English Online France","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2LpG4czz6oM0cDt2Gd0mJO"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"English Online France是一个非常有趣的在线英文听力训练网站，依照初级、中级和高级区分的英文听力训练教材共超过一百个项目，包括听写练习与测验的MP3语音教材以及听力练习与测验的影片。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2NkXL6X0kZcPo7uVMWNfLI"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":619,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"推荐学习网站","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/9cef53fb83ee456f855abafe1b682163","width":971},"text":"","id":"doxcn4ptkZ85t8TasnhUru8hQVd"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"口语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn3YjJRnkXUEZbK *** hh7jk0O"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"语言不是教会的，而是在使用中学会的。交际能力只能在交际中得到最有效的培养。一个优秀的语言学习者应具有强烈的语言交际的欲望，应力争语言训练的各种机会。应该不怕因犯语言错误而被别人讥笑。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"（口语的基础练习可以在b站上搜索，也可以","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"结合下文讲解，","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"在该连接中","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"看视频配合学习","id":""},{"type":"external_link","attrs":{"url":"https://www.bilibili.com/video/av378675437/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b"},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"https://www.bilibili.com/video/av378675437/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b","id":""}],"text":"","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnrcC1IGOuALt9pw7qUyz2Fv"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":596,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"口语","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/3fef193ad9d34d5c99e0c1d5e166215f","width":896},"text":"","id":"doxcn6mVn3Q0JYzoycJgoXxBh0c"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"明确学习任务","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnua575Ls8kF2CYx7wDtH5Gf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1.","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":" ","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一定要用完整句子对话","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn80chwA8vggV1g74yIymvyd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"面对任何问题，都不能只回答表面内容，一定要在此基础上展开回答。如果别人问你一个问题，你只回答 Yes 或者 No，那如何提高口语呢？即使遇到了一个你根本不了解或者不会的问题，也千万不要用：“Sorry, I don’t know”或者“No”来回应。比如别人问了一个最基础的问题，“Where are you from?” 你千万不能只说：“I come from Beijing.”正确的做法是：先说明你来自北京，然后介绍一下北京的风土人情、家乡美食等等，最后再和对方互动一下，问你去过北京吗？或者你觉得北京这座城市怎么样呢？","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8Am29JWp2EnJRUJbgM0cAs"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2.多使用一些复杂句和从句","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEHGw7CDtKePv09IVO9GJub"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"然后在平时练习过程中，要将简单句和","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"复杂句","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"交错使用，不要一直用简单的句子，这样会显得你的水平很 Low，也不要一直说很复杂的句子，因为很容易出错。在变换不同的句式的时候，记得不要出错。避免一直说简单句的更好 *** 就是，多说一些稍微复杂一点的从句，比如定语从句、","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"条件状语从句","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"、主语从句等等，同时一些相同意思的句子也不要用重复表达，要学会多尝试用不同的句式说出来。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcntl5ggqZs1SveFYXERCKt7d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3.通过美剧学习口语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnzPBHKebdTWoMlsEiSqDjMb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"通过美剧学习英语口语也是很多人可能有尝试的 *** ，对于上班族来说可以一边放松心情的同时学习英语。我建议可选择那些与日常生活比较贴近、故事情节较强的影视材料。例如金色年代。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqc0oBahh961fx6AGeNXnxh"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":352,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"明确学习任务","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/0cc317719f8e46358e6469afbdddf745","width":530},"text":"","id":"doxcnUawhbt9LAbMNtGyT5rjQje"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"口语的基础练习可以在b站上搜索","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"MrYang杨家成","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"，这个老师讲解的每个视频内容虽然简短，但是老师在讲解前就利用学生的错误发音进行纠正，充满趣味性的同时也能认识到口语发音方面的错误。我这边为大家找到一个不错的视频内容，链接如下：","id":""},{"type":"external_link","attrs":{"url":"https://www.bilibili.com/video/av378675437/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b"},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"https://www.bilibili.com/video/av378675437/?vd_source=5d64dd8ffce01670b3c7c8c70257178b","id":""}],"text":"","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"，如果需要的话可以试着看看一看。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAniyl28BcwrOMGSXZMG7Sd"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"英音发音学习","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8jUdHxtD0q2Ca9U9XMhKcw"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1.建立英音的肌肉反射","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2Bgwdg1Q7WFlotEPgFlzzg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在我们开始在美音和英音间做出实质性的发音改变之前。我们首先要知道，发音的改变是要体现在每一个音上的，这样的改变才能导致整体上发音的变化。这包括说话过程中嘴型的变化，以及嘴部肌肉运动方式的变化。这是一个整体上的变化。并不只在有某个变化音的词里，你才能听到这样的变化，而是在每个音节上都可以听的出来。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn9xr07pVHQAHJOjIbjJsxeb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"所以想要练习一口标准的英式英语，之一步也是必不可少的一步就是练习音标。将每个音标老老实实的学习，通过肌肉发射，对后面的英式英语的口语练习能有很大的帮助。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnc25ajSh9MJ9ZuAwKzwIk5e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2.建立英音语言环境","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnDI3rJYrt2kCNt *** faMWJmh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"学一门语言，更好的当然就是处于一个特定的语言环境内。既然我们是在国内，没有办法实现英式英语的环境，那么我就可以通过听力来实现输入的问题，通过口语来实现输出的问题。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnItlQCgm0HI7U8XL0lN3nGh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"而对于锻炼听力，最推从的 *** 就是听万能的BBC了。你要知道，在BBC，不仅仅只有新闻的，BBC还有很多栏目，比如BBC Learning，就是可以通过上面的视频进行练习口语听力的栏目。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwHmPWhIl***kDLEJTASgmag"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3.建立口语交流机制","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnz7znoLcR8PJs5NGgEiTumf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"现在互联网这么发达，我们完全可以通过sns来和世界交流。你只要学会FAN墙，就可以通过Facebook、Twitter、Whatsapp来找到愿意和你交流的人，如果他愿意学习中文是再好不过的了，这样互助互利是最持久的。不过记住，我们是要练习英式英语，所以更好找英国，或者加拿大的。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnrRBvMT5kQV0UBb8xf8Pcxg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"4.英式发音技巧","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnPmSElkK8Ln9GVw9xhfqG7b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"“R”不发音，不卷舌","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneQqIl9vYv6nZ8N7aadglUd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"T不发D音，发T音或不发音","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnjwqt9HXoI1nICAJGGHbsCh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"请注意，“H”并不总是发音","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnLAMcR2eJySZiDSAWw12USd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":" 单词“been”的读音是“bean”，而不是“bin”","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnpGGCrWQLAA9NEhwglolxKe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"结尾降调","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6aeWLuqOC8x6mEvNnAis2b"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"美音发音学习","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnN4ta7kwp7Fx0qE7s5mec4f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1.准备好学习的视频参照物","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcndaDJTU1LsVAhezCVIpznMX"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"仅仅是自己照着音标、课本练习朗读，不能使自己的发音改善。学习发音视频教程，才是最容易、最直观、最简单的 *** 。因为，可以直观地看到美国人的嘴形、舌头的位置，这样可以很容易自我调整。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnJ66dwrjnfif5ARMng7doIe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"请在免费WiFi下，请自行百度：美式发音训练视频教程(汇总贴)。可以很容易找到美国Paul老师的视频教程。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcntlV04Lro46oKCrXu0IO6Yg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2.制定学习计划，每天学习1集视频","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnj4goxfOdeUXbx4eZFNzA4b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"每天观看1集视频，并且在安静、不被打扰的环境下学习。跟着视频一起，自己张口练习。练习时，不用去记忆生词，只需要张口练习发音就好。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnykbhvgkb9sTQ7ddwKsjyBg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"学习完1集视频后，找找自己熟悉的单词、简单句子，按照刚刚学会的 *** 轻松、张口朗读。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnHXjtIW65YnYS2zzXQJGd0c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"嘴巴重新习惯需要时间。所以，请在学习第2、3、4天，轻松复习第1天学习的发音，并张口练习。这时，不用重新看视频，只需要读一读单词、简单句子。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIV *** eio8xvVmf***ovzgDze"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3.巩固训练","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnHh7WVDzXhSnPOLp84zocph"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在平时自己朗读自己喜欢的文章时，特意留意学会的新的发音。这是进步的最后一步。如果自己没有调整，还是按照自己以前的发音 *** ，那就没进步了!","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnhKpCrCrsybqYTSoO0Gclod"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果按照这样的步骤，认真练习，任何一个自己不会的发音，每位朋友都可以在1周内熟练掌握。1个月内就可以掌握所有的标准美式发音了。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnN7Qg39OmoVkLqRiHmeMjmf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"4.强化训练","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnzbxdiLmiMlIUvH1PtxyOdc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果学习过美国Paul老师的教程，还觉得不够。再推荐一个视频教程：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn9gQ1q9mWplJ1yGiT1XLXyb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"美国 Lisa 老师的——Lisa美语视频教程。请按照同样的反复，每次学习30分钟吧","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnXVSsf7wDN37P91JfWo9uCb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"5.美式发音技巧","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnsEyPamcvvVZqGAqoRoYgCf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"当字母R出现在最后一个字母位置的时候，要发卷舌音。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnx2CWfpVikAHBBqUvcFkrYM"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"当字母R的后面紧跟一个辅音字母的时候，这里的R要发音/r/","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnbx7h6y4AyScuOvfmYVCwwf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"美式发音中的第二个特征,是关于美式浊化音。比如letter这个单词，其中的字母t就需要百分之五十浊化成发音/d/，有点类似ladder了。.","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIlr6VccCrAYZDvKKmjr6wh"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"口语app","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnNn5aRsPSY0uClTNB0zjMjf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"扇贝口语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn1xQDPd73gaCqWyXvrmrAXc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"这是一款旨在让用户“听得懂、说得出”的英语口语学习app，适合所有阶段人群，扇贝口语的课程系统完善，而且形式比较丰富，包括角色扮演，发音打分和故事模式，通过跟读以及听音复述和智能打分的形式，帮助培养开口习惯，纠正发音错误。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn1vvkLtwpDzIFC4yV706Cfg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":680,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"口语app","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/f6dce05c82bf4dd6b121e78ba47fd80a","width":1022},"text":"","id":"doxcnmOPKf8UJLtgeRfIAXrDLF7"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"流利说英语","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnrfswMxU8HpX3xfjfcmtkAh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"这是一款智能口语打分软件，内置各种以场景为主题的课程，你可以跟读模仿，然后系统会根据你的发音情况进行打分，他的练习材料非常丰富，从教材到职场，从生活到影视剧，而且都有难度划分，逐渐升级。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnsHMd5SyxNVjHdPYDl9J***b"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":461,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"口语app","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/2043c818292c4f86b5a58216126c49a9","width":694},"text":"","id":"doxcnMiK9GeJjwjvWS8FLcwOJua"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"英语后期学习","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnhmUCRSpuEGPb***3kfTZrNb"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"练习","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCHSR2t6m306E2wX8Zw26Eg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"后期就要把你珍藏的真题拿出来了，从头到尾掐准时间（可以在开始的时候把时间写在卷题上，结束对照一下时间），作文可以先不写（前5套真题左右，把作文专项练习一下），一套真题两三天左右吃透，半个月时间把作文好好练习一下（文末附有大小作文模板以及视频），做完对照答案，（如何分析和做阅读，前面的文章已经讲过了）分数依然不重要，重要的是知道自己的薄弱地方，单词、语法、阅读速度还是注意力的问题。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn98ChRZY7cmLmdgPed0hv3c"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":481,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"练习","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/3551ef9f3c724f4991e531507c6605dd","width":720},"text":"","id":"doxcnX6Cvuhb5Vwd8SFv6qa3U9f"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"背单词","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnBzS2BYNc6jNdNFMpHBDqQm"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"单词不用说，该背还要背，这个时间可以有侧重点的背，同时还需要把重点放在真题中单词上来，一定要注意熟词僻义。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnW8xAWJv4iv65s79M9Ow50c"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":480,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"背单词","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/07afafd991d44a1085aff17a8ff11ad3","width":720},"text":"","id":"doxcnyoBqoRdtTyyodHXEWeYTSd"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"阅读","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnimOTAvabfb8dXPzyQ4AAcg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"仔细思考做题过程中的这个题做错了，为什么做错，我当初怎么想的，答案又是怎么说的，有没有了解出题人的意图，带着这些问题，把错的选项分析一遍，做个小结，在题旁边标注，属于哪种错误，是粗心大意还是单词或者翻译错误等；其次是单词，这个单词我背过吗，是生词还是背过忘了，然后查出这个单词，记在自己的单词本或者在单词出处记下来，第二天背下来。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnhUSj3jzBNrgZQJMOD8XFTb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":465,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"阅读","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/54b405eb55d04519b7181899e35529ee","width":696},"text":"","id":"doxcnFvq6HeNlKFyAqAEkQkbX3g"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"作文","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnpLzO97jEckwVUFvKIivhpg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"怎么构思，如果这次试卷就是考试，我该从哪下手，我是不是又用了，老掉牙的词，背的好词好句有没有用上等；最后就是总结，把阅读、单词、作文遇到的问题做个总结，做个规划去处理，然后第二天去复习，直到这张试卷你认为没有什么价值了，那么你复盘总结就是成功的。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnNNUhjM8lgrGQEXuuMqRUEg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":800,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"作文","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/ed636c887c314c3e9d0f3880020bb113","width":1200},"text":"","id":"doxcncDWKFnzQEF5EJ3EQW6a7cg"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"总结","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIWNLRiDucBDag6O7zsyuNj"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"最后说一下完成这个阶段所需的时间，我建议用两个月去完成是比较合适的。不要拖太长时间，不要在学习的舒适区呆太久。我们是需要感觉到自己在进步，需要有很多正反馈才能继续坚持学习的。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnX7UKfpZFcM1TGk9kUVSUjf"}]%3C%2Fhowto_content%3E

3、ppt *** 教程？

为什么这个幻灯片背景不能修改?如何取消幻灯片的自动播放?……这些问题经常被职场小白问起。这篇适合PPT小白快速入门的实用教程，目的是让读者学会、掌握、应用PPT，达到知其然并知其所以然。

了解PPT

初识PPT

PPT是Office办公组件中的一个软件。使用PPT创作的文件叫演示文稿，可以在投影仪或电脑上进行播放，也可将演示文稿打印出来，供他人浏览阅读。

一般情况下，大众喜爱的PPT通常都有一些相同的特点：内容准确清晰，版式简洁大方，动画则恰到好处。

1、内容准确清晰。PPT主要负责传递信息，所以需要严密的逻辑框架作为支撑。因此，通过看PPT的内容逻辑是否准确、清晰，就可以判断PPT是好还是坏。

2、版式简洁大方。PPT是用来传达观点的，所以不需要 *** 得太过复杂。一些初学者喜欢将各种各样的元素都放入PPT中，结果作品的效果却不尽如人意，观众也很难在杂乱无章的版式中获取演讲者所要表达的观点。

3、动画恰到好处。在PPT中恰到好处的动画会起到锦上添花的作用，多余复杂的动画则容易喧宾夺主。

了解PPT的结构

一、PPT的操作界面

PPT的操作界面主要包括标题栏、功能区、编辑区、文件菜单、视图区和状态栏。

1、标题栏。标题栏位于页面的最顶部，从左至右依次是快速访问工具栏、演示文稿名称、登录按钮、功能区显示选项按钮、最小化按钮、更大化按钮和关闭按钮。

2、功能区。功能区位于标题栏下方，默认包含8个选项卡，每个选项卡中包含多个选项组，相同类别的命令通常集中在同一个选项组中。同一个选项卡中包含的命令按钮也属于同一种类型。

下面详细介绍一下各选项卡的功能。

（1）“开始”选项卡。该选项卡中包括“剪贴板”“幻灯片”“字体”“段落”“绘图”和“编辑”6个选项组。在此，用户可以新建幻灯片，设置幻灯片的文本、段落以及样式等。

（2）“插入”选项卡。该选项卡包括“幻灯片”“表格”“图像”“插图”“加载项”“链接”“批注”“文本”“符号”及“媒体”选项组。在此，用户可以在幻灯片中插入各种表格、图片、超链接、文本框、公式、音像等元素。

（3）“设计”选项卡。该选项卡包括：“主题”“变体”“自定义”选项组。在此，用户可以对幻灯片的大小、背景格式等进行设置。

（4）“切换”选项卡。该选项卡包括“预览”“切换到此幻灯片”“计时”选项组。在此，用户可以为幻灯片设置各种切换效果。

（5）“动画”选项卡。该选项卡包括“预览”“动画”“高级动画”和“计时”选项组。在此，用户可以为其文本、图片等添加各种动画效果。

（6）“幻灯片放映”选项卡。该选项卡包括“开始放映幻灯片”“设置”“监视器”选项组。在此，用户可以对幻灯片的放映参数进行设置。

（7）“审阅”选项卡。该选项卡包括“校对”“语言”“比较”“墨迹”选项组。在此，用户可以对文字进行批注、检索、字体的简繁转换等。

（8）“视图”选项卡。该选项卡包括“演示文稿视图”“母版视图”“显示”“显示比例”“窗口”和“宏”选项组。在此，用户可以设置幻灯片的视图模式、显示标尺和网格线等。

3、编辑区。编辑区位于整个页面的中心位置，是演示文稿的工作区域。用户可以在编辑区内输入文字、插入图片、绘制图形等。编辑区的显示比例可以根据需要自由放大或缩小。

4、“文件”菜单。单击界面左上角的“文件”菜单按钮，可以打开“文件”菜单，该菜单中包含“信息”“新建”“打开”“保存”“另存为”“打印”“共享”“导出”“关闭”“帐户”等12个选项。

5、状态栏。状态栏位于界面更底部，从左到右依次显示的命令有“幻灯片页数”“当前显示页码”“拼写检索”按钮、“语言”“备注”按钮、“批注”按钮、“视图”按钮、“幻灯片放映”按钮、“视图缩放栏”等。

二、完整的PPT构成

一份完整的PPT包含5部分，分别为标题页、目录页、过渡页、内容页和结尾页，下面将分别对其进行详细介绍。

1、标题页。标题页决定观众的之一印象，如果标题页设计不好，则很难吸引观众的眼球。标题页可以是图片+文字的形式，也可以是纯文字形式。

（1）图片+文字。以图片为主的标题页，具有较强的感染力，如果再加上富有震撼力的标题文字，那就更容易吸引观众的视线了。这种形式的标题页需要注意的一个问题是所选的图片一定要是高清图片。

（2）纯文字。纯文字的标题页，需要考虑排版问题。建议初学者尽量不要尝试。有时为了避免页面版式空洞，可以适当添加一些形状来修饰。

2、目录页。一般情况下，目录页紧随标题页之后。目录页可让观众了解PPT的大致内容。目录页的表现形式有多种，下面将分别对其进行介绍。

（1）利用形状。目录页简洁明了，能突出重点即可，所以使用形状是不错的选择。

（2）利用PNG图标。使用图标，可以帮助观众更好地记忆内容，并且看起来简洁清爽，不会喧宾夺主。

（3）利用图片。将目录与图片结合起来，能有效打破页面的平淡无奇，给人眼前一亮的感觉。

3、过渡页。如果PPT的页数较多，可以在其中添加过渡页，这样可以给观众一个短暂的休息时间。当然如果PPT的页数较少，就没有必要添加了，可以根据实际情况而定。

4、内容页。内容页是整个PPT中必不可少的，也是最重要的一部分，多以图文结合的页面形式来传达内容。

5、结尾页。结束页可以写一些激励性或感谢性的文字，或是表达美好祝愿的话语。同时要注意与PPT的整体风格相呼应。

三、PPT与幻灯片的关系

PPT又叫演示文稿，格式后缀为.ppt、.pptx。演示文稿中的每一页就叫幻灯片，每张幻灯片都是演示文稿中既相互独立又相互联系的内容。

PPT的基本操作

对PPT结构有所了解后，接下来就要了解一下PPT的基本操作了。PPT的基本操作包括创建演示文稿、保存演示文稿、打开和关闭演示文稿、查看演示文稿等，下面分别对其进行详细介绍。

1、轻松创建文稿

创建PPT的 *** 有多种，下面以创建模板PPT为例，向用户介绍具体的操作 *** 。

步骤1：双击PowerPoint应用程序快捷图标，启动软件，在打开界面右侧的搜索框中输入需要搜索模板的类型，然后单击“开始搜索”按钮。

步骤2：随即在新建界面中显示出所有搜索到的模板，单击选择需要的模板。

步骤3：弹出模板详情窗口，接着单击“创建”按钮。

步骤4：系统开始下载该模板，下载完成后会自动打开该模板，即可创建一个模板PPT。

2、保存与另存为

在创建演示文稿后，需要将其保存，以免因为意外断电或电脑死机，而造成文件内容丢失。在创建演示文稿后，如果用户是之一次执行保存操作，则可以按照以下 *** 进行保存。

步骤1：在演示文稿界面，单击“文件”菜单按钮。

步骤2：在打开的“文件”菜单窗口中选择“另存为”选项，在右侧选择“浏览”选项。

步骤3：打开“另存为”对话框，从中选择保存的位置，修改“文件名”，单击“保存”按钮。

步骤4：返回演示文稿，此时可以看到，标题栏中即显示修改后的演示文稿的名称。当用户执行保存操作后，若对演示文稿进行了修改和编辑，直接单击“保存”按钮即可对其保存。

3、打开与关闭操作

打开演示文稿的操作 *** 其实很简单，除了双击文件图标外，还可以按照以下几种 *** 进行操作。

（1）右键打开法。打开文件所在的文件夹，单击选中需要打开的演示文稿，然后单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“打开”命令，即可打开所选的演示文稿。

（2）打开计算机中的演示文稿。还可以利用已打开的演示文稿选择计算机中的其他演示文稿，具体操作如下：

步骤1：在打开的演示文稿中单击“文件”菜单按钮。（也可以通过Ctrl+O快捷键打开计算机中的演示文稿，这种 *** 更加方便快捷。）

步骤2：进入“文件”菜单，选择“打开”选项，并在右侧选择“浏览”选项。

步骤3：弹出“打开”对话框，选中需要打开的演示文稿，然后单击“打开”按钮，即可打开选中的演示文稿。

4、查看演示文稿

在 *** 完演示文稿后，为了确保内容的准确性，可以对演示文稿中的内容进行查看。

（1）普通视图。在普通视图下，将光标移到编辑区上方，滑动鼠标滚轮可以对幻灯片的内容进行查看，或者将光标放在右侧的滑块上，拖动鼠标查看PPT中的内容。

（2）幻灯片浏览。在状态栏中单击“幻灯片浏览”按钮，可在浏览模式中对演示文稿中所有幻灯片进行查看。

（3）阅读视图。在状态栏中单击“阅读视图”按钮，即可进入放映预览状态，在这种状态下，用户可以对幻灯片中的内容和动画效果进行查看。

幻灯片的基本操作

前面介绍了演示文稿的基本操作，接下来学习一下幻灯片的基本操作，包括选择幻灯片、新建幻灯片、移动与***幻灯片、隐藏与删除幻灯片、更改幻灯片的背景等。

一、选择幻灯片

1、选择单个幻灯片。如果想选择单个幻灯片，则只需在预览区域单击所需幻灯片，即可将其选中。

2、选择不连续的幻灯片。按住Ctrl键不放，在预览区域中依次用鼠标单击多个幻灯片，即可将不连续的幻灯片选中。

3、选择连续的幻灯片。按住Shift键，在预览区域中单击任意两个不相邻的幻灯片，即可将它们之间的所有幻灯片选中。

4、选择全部幻灯片。首先单击预览区域中任意幻灯片，然后按Ctrl+A组合键，即可将全部幻灯片选中。

二、新建幻灯片

若演示文稿中的幻灯片太少，不能满足编辑需求，则用户可以在演示文稿中新建幻灯片。

步骤1：打开演示文稿，选中任意一张幻灯片，在“开始”选项卡中单击“新建幻灯片”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“空白”选项。

步骤2：被选中的幻灯片下方随即新建一个“空白”版式的幻灯片。

步骤3：若在下拉列表中选择“两栏内容”选项。

步骤4：即可新建“两栏内容”版式的幻灯片。

注：还可以通过右键菜单功能来新建幻灯片，即选择任意幻灯片，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“新建幻灯片”命令，即可新建—个幻灯片。

三、移动与***幻灯片

在编辑演示文稿的过程中，如果觉得幻灯片的顺序不合理，可以移动幻灯片来调整其顺序。若需要添加相同格式的幻灯片，则可以***幻灯片，下面将介绍几种移动与***幻灯片的 *** 。

1、移动幻灯片。可以按照以下几种 *** 移动幻灯片：

（1）功能区按钮移动

步骤1：选择需要移动的幻灯片，在“开始”选项卡中单击“剪切”按钮。

步骤2：将光标定位至需要移动到的位置，单击“粘贴”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“使用目标主题”选项。

步骤3：随即将所选幻灯片移动到目标位置。

（2）鼠标拖动移动

步骤1：选择需要的幻灯片，然后按住鼠标左键不放，拖动鼠标至合适位置。

步骤2：释放鼠标左键，即可完成幻灯片的移动。

2、***幻灯片

若用户想要添加相同格式的幻灯片，则可以利用***功能来实现，下面介绍几种***幻灯片的 *** 。

（1）功能区按钮***

步骤1：选择需要***的幻灯片，在“开始”选项卡中单击“***”按钮。

步骤2：在需要粘贴的位置插入光标，单击“粘贴”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“使用目标主题”选项即可。

步骤3：此时在该位置可显示所***的幻灯片。

（2）右键快捷菜单***

选择幻灯片后，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“***幻灯片”命令即可。

（3）鼠标+键盘***

选择需要***的幻灯片，并按住鼠标左键不放，接着在键盘上按住Ctrl键，然后拖动鼠标至合适位置，释放鼠标左键后松开Ctrl键，即可***选择的幻灯片。

四、隐藏与显示幻灯片

如果不想播放某张幻灯片，但又不想将其删除，则可以将该幻灯片隐藏起来。

步骤1：选择需要隐藏的幻灯片，这里选择第2张幻灯片，切换至“幻灯片放映”选项卡，单击“隐藏幻灯片”按钮。

步骤2：此时，可以看到所选幻灯片的左上角出现了隐藏符号。如果想要显示隐藏的幻灯片，则需要再次单击“隐藏幻灯片”按钮，即可将隐藏的幻灯片显示出来。

注：还可以通过右键菜单来隐藏幻灯片，即选择需要隐藏的幻灯片，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“隐藏幻灯片”命令，即可将选择的幻灯片隐藏起来。

五、删除幻灯片

当演示文稿中的幻灯片较多，有些内容多余，想精减时，可以将冗余的幻灯片删除。下面介绍两种删除幻灯片的 *** 。

1、右键菜单法。选择需要删除的幻灯片，然后单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“删除幻灯片”命令，即可将选择的幻灯片删除。

2、快捷键法。选择需要删除的幻灯片，然后直接在键盘上按Delete键，即可将所选幻灯片删除。

六、调整幻灯片大小

默认的幻灯片大小为宽屏（16：9），用户也可以根据需要自定义幻灯片的大小，下面介绍具体的操作 *** 。

步骤1：选择幻灯片，切换至“设计”选项卡，单击“幻灯片大小”下拉按钮，从中选择“自定义幻灯片大小”选项。

步骤2：打开“幻灯片大小”对话框，在“幻灯片大小”下拉列表中选择“自定义”选项，设置“宽度”和“高度”值，单击“确定”按钮。

步骤3：弹出相应的对话框，从中选择“确保适合”选项。

步骤4：此时，可以看到幻灯片的尺寸随即被调整为自定义的大小。

注：也可以直接在“幻灯片大小”下拉列表中选择“标准”选项，快速更改幻灯片的大小。

七、更改幻灯片的背景

如果对当前幻灯片的背景不满意，可以对其进行更改。具体操作 *** 如下：

步骤1：选择幻灯片，在“设计”选项卡中单击“设置背景格式”按钮。

步骤2：弹出“设置背景格式”窗格，切换至“填充”选项卡，在“填充”组中选中“图片或纹理填充”单选按钮，接着单击下方的“文件”按钮。

步骤3：打开“插入图片”对话框，选择图片后单击“插入”按钮。

步骤4：关闭窗格，此时可以看到幻灯片的背景更改为图片背景的效果了。

版式设计

了解PPT的基本操作后，用户可以 *** 出简单的演示文稿，但如果想 *** 出精美大气的作品，则需要对版式进行一番设计。本节将对PPT的版式设计、模板的运用、PPT的配色等进行全面介绍。

PPT版式设计原则

一、什么样的页面版式才好看

好看的页面版式会遵循亲近、对比、对齐和重复这4项原则。

1、亲近

内容上有关联的要靠近，没有关联的要远离，同时要统一各段落的间隔。

2、对齐

各层之间要对齐，因为每一个元素都与页面上的某项内容存在某种视觉联系，如果随意安放，则会显得混乱。但页面中有很多个关键字时，打破对齐也能产生不一样的视觉效果。

3、对比

对比的 *** 有3种：文字对比、颜色对比和图形对比。通过对比可以迅速吸引观众的眼球。

下图则通过图形色块来区分各项内容。当观众看到这张幻灯片内容时，会立即被黄***块的内容吸引住。这里需要提醒一点的是，对比的力度一定要大，否则就不要用。

4、重复

通过让PPT的部分元素，例如图片、字体、配色等重复使用，可以使PPT的版式风格统一，避免杂乱无章。但需要注意的是，不要一味地单调重复，要明确每个页面的作用。

（1）标题页

（2）目录页

（3）内容页

（4）结尾页

二、PPT中的留白艺术

留白留出的是空间。对于幻灯片而言，最直观的好处就是用户可以轻易地添加文字，保证文字信息不受干扰，和图片一起传递信息。另外，留白具有与生俱来的雅致、高端、文艺、轻盈、简约气质。下面就向读者介绍在PPT中人为留白的3种 *** 。

1、寻找简单的背景图。尽量用简单的图片作为幻灯片背景，然后添加与主题相关的关键字即可。当然寻找的图片也应当与主题相关才行。

2、利用形状衬托关键字。利用精致的图片作为背景，使用矩形覆盖背景某区域，以作为文字的底衬，在矩形框中输入文字即可。该矩形框可填充颜色，也可提高它的透明度。

3、减少页面信息量。留出空白其实就是做减法。减去多余的，留出关键的信息即可。

三、页面排版的4大利器

想要实现以上4项排版原则，则需要利用以下4种辅助工具来操作。

1、对齐。PPT为用户提供了8种对齐方式。通过使用这些对齐方式，用户可以快速完成页面的布局，提高PPT排版效率，对齐的操作 *** 如下：：

步骤1：选择需对齐的元素，这里选择文本，切换至“绘图工具-格式”选项卡，单击“对齐”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“垂直居中”选项。

步骤2：此时可以看到，选中的文本已经显示为垂直居中。

步骤3：若在列表中选择“右对齐”选项，则选中的文本将向右对齐显示。

2、组合。将多个对象组合在一起后，可以实现整体的快速移动，当缩小或放大形状组合时，组合中的所有形状的大小会同时发生改变，具体操作 *** 如下：

步骤1：选中图形对象，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“组合”选项。

步骤2：将形状组合在一起后，按住Shift键不放，可以等比例放大或缩小图形。

3、窗格。窗格可以通过单击“绘图工具-格式”选项卡中的“选择窗格”按钮打开，窗格的作用是调节各个元素的层次，对此也可以通过鼠标拖动来实现，还可以通过单击按钮实现。此外，通过窗格还可以隐藏元素，单击右侧的眼睛图标即可隐藏。

4、网格与参考线。网格和参考线一般用来定位PPT中的各元素。两者都是在编辑状态下显示，播放幻灯片时则会自动隐藏。

如果需要调出网格或参考线的话，只需要在“视图”选项卡中勾选“网格”或“参考线”选项即可。这两个选项卡可以同时勾选，也可以只勾选其中一项。在对页面进行排版时，只需勾选“参考线”这一项即可。在勾选参考线后，系统会在页面中心位置分别显示水平和垂直两条参考线。

需要添加参考线的话，只需将光标放置在参考线上，当光标变成双向箭头时，点击鼠标右键，在弹出的快捷菜单中根据需要选择“添加垂直参考线”或“添加水平参考线”选项即可。也可以为参考线更换颜色。同样在参考线上点击鼠标右键，在快捷菜单中选择“颜色”选项，并在打开的级联菜单中选择一种颜色即可。

如果想要删除参考线，只需在“视图”选项卡中，取消勾选“参考线”选项即可。也可以在参考线上单击鼠标右键，在快捷菜单中选择“删除”选项，即可删除多余参考线。

用好PPT模板

如果用户觉得自己 *** 模板比较耗时，则可套用网上下载的模板，或者对现有模板进行修改，符合要求后再使用。

一、如何挑选模板

网上有大量的模板，其中不乏精品，但选择模板时，一定要挑选合适的模板。这里将介绍挑选模板的3个原则。

1、符合公司形象。如果用户展示的演示文稿代表整个公司，那么选择的模板一定要符合公司的形象。一般会选择严肃、大方的模板。

2、契合展示主题。选择模板时要符合展示的主题，不同的主题对模板的要求不一样。例如，如果主题是关于儿童教育的，就尽量用卡通类的，或者各种手绘风格的模板。

3、让人眼前一亮。用户 *** PPT除了辅助演讲外，最重要的是吸引观众的注意力，所以 *** 的PPT要有特色，看起来让人赏心悦目，这样才能让人眼前一亮。

注：可以通过PPT论坛、共享网站、PPT商店、PPT模板下载网站以及达人的博客或微博下载需要的PPT模板。需要提醒一点的是，下载模板时需弄清楚该模板是否可以商用。很多模板都存在版权问题，用户私下交流没有关系，一旦涉及商用，就需缴纳一定的版权费了。

二、对模板进行微调

一般情况下，模板下载完以后，都需要对其调整，毕竟没有百分之百合适的模板。当用户需要对模板进行调整时，可以分3步操作：删除、改变和添加。

1、删除多余页面或元素。删除模板中一些多余的页面，因为有些页面只是版面设计不同，而内容是相同的，像这些页面就需要删除。

2、改变。可以改变幻灯片的大小、背景图、配色、字体和版式设计等。首先，可以修改以下幻灯片的版式设计。其次，可以将标题幻灯片中的文字进行修改，例如修改其文字内容、字体或字号等。

3、添加。如果现有的版式不能完全满足需求，则可以另外添加一页版式。用户只需根据自己的需求简单调整即可。这样做出来的PPT既快又好。想高效 *** PPT，使用模板是更佳的选择。

三、认识幻灯片的母版

使用母版更大的好处在于，它可以快速统一幻灯片的风格，例如文字、图片、背景等。下面将详细介绍母版的结构和类型。

步骤1：打开演示文稿，切换至“视图”选项卡，单击“幻灯片母版”按钮。

步骤2：进入母版视图后，在左侧可以看到一组默认的母版结构。

步骤3：Office主题。该页位于母版视图的首位，也称之为母版页。在这一页中添加的内容会出现在以下所有版式页中。

注：母版视图是由母版页和版式页这两个部分组成的。母版页仅为第1张幻灯片，除此之外，所有的幻灯片都称为版式页。

步骤4：标题幻灯片。可用于幻灯片的封面、封底设计。与母版页不同时，需要勾选隐藏背景图形复选框。

步骤5：标题和内容。由标题框架和内容框架部分组成。

步骤6：此外，还有节标题、两栏内容、比较、仅标题、空白、内容与标题版式等。这些版式都可以根据设计需要重新调整。

四、修改幻灯片的母版

用户可以在幻灯片母版中修改字体和版式，使幻灯片形成统一的风格。具体操作步骤介绍如下：

步骤1：打开演示文稿，切换至“视图”选项卡，单击“幻灯片母版”按钮。

步骤2：进入母版视图模式，然后选择Office主题母版，并选中其中的标题占位符。

步骤3：切换至“开始”选项卡，单击“字体”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“汉仪行楷简”选项。

步骤4：单击“字号”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“40”。

步骤5：按照同样的 *** ，设置文本占位符中的字体、字号。

步骤6：切换至“幻灯片母版”选项卡，单击“背景样式”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“设置背景格式”选项。

步骤7：打开“设置背景格式”窗格，切换至“填充”选项卡，在“填充”组中选中“图片或纹理填充”单选按钮，并单击“文件”按钮。

步骤8：打开“插入图片”对话框，从中选择背景图片后单击“插入”按钮。

步骤9：关闭窗格，切换至“插入”选项卡，单击“图片”按钮。

步骤10：打开“插入图片”对话框，选择图片后单击“插入”按钮。

步骤11：将图片插入到母版中，调整图片的大小，将其移至页面合适位置。

步骤12：按照同样的 *** ，插入另外—张图片，然后将其移至合适位置。

步骤13：选中标题幻灯片，在“背景”选项组中勾选“隐藏背景图形”复选框。

步骤14：隐藏图形后，为其填充背景图片。在“插入”选项卡中单击“图片”按钮。

步骤15：打开“插入图片”对话框，选择图片后单击“插入”按钮。

步骤16：插入图片后调整图片的大小，并将其移至页面合适位置。

步骤17：单击“幻灯片母版”选项卡中的“关闭母版视图”按钮，查看设置的效果。

用好的配色装扮PPT

PPT中的颜色很重要，一个页面色彩靓丽且配色舒适的PPT很容易就能抓往观众的眼球。当然也不能胡乱的运用色彩，下面将介绍关于配色方面的知识，为设计PPT的版式打好基础。

一、几种安全配色模式

1、灰底单色搭配。使用灰色作为背景色，和其他单一颜色进行搭配。灰色可以营造出精致、含蓄的氛围。

2、白底单色搭配。白色是百搭色，使用白色作为背景色，可以和任意颜色进行搭配。白色给人一种清爽、干净的感觉。

3、同色系明暗搭配。尝试使用同一种色相、不同明度的颜色进行搭配。这种 *** 比较简单和安全。

4、只用单一背景色。有时使用单一的背景色加上几个关键字或图片，也能起到很好的效果。

二、取色器的使用秘诀

使用取色器可以将其他PPT中的配色提取并运用到自己的PPT中，也可以从图片中快速提取出需要的颜色。下面将为大家介绍具体的操作 *** ：

步骤1：选中需要填充颜色的图形，切换至“绘图工具-格式”选项卡，单击“形状填充”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“取色器”选项。

步骤2：此时，鼠标光标变为吸管形状，将它移动到想要填充的色块上，在吸管右侧会显示该色块的色值。

步骤3：确认后单击鼠标左键，即可将选取的颜色快速填充到图形中。

注：在电脑系统中，R、G、B分别代表着红色、绿色和蓝色，这3种颜色的值均用0-255的整数来表示。例如，纯红色的色值为（255，0，0），纯绿色的色值为（0.255，0），而纯蓝色的色值为（0.，0.255）。用户只要在“颜色”对话框的“颜色模式”选项组下设置这些色值参数即可，在默认情况下“颜色模式”为“RGB“。

学会运用PPT主题

前面介绍了创建模板演示文稿，其实使用主题创建演示文稿也是一种不错的选择，这样可以免去用户自己设计主题的麻烦。

一、使用主题创建PPT

使用主题创建演示文稿的 *** 和创建模板演示文稿相似，具体的操作步骤如下：

步骤1：启动PowerPoint，在打开界面的右侧单击“主题”按钮。

步骤2：在搜索到的主题中选择合适的选项。

步骤3：单击该选项，将弹出一个窗格，然后直接单击“创建”按钮。

步骤4：系统开始下载该主题演示文稿，下载完成后会自动打开演示文稿。

二、修改主题样式

如果对默认的主题样式不满意，可以对主题的颜色、字体、背景等进行修改，下面介绍具体的操作 *** ：

步骤1：修改主题颜色。切换至“设计”选项卡，单击“变体”选项组中的“其他”按钮，从列表中选择“颜色”选项，并从其级联菜单中选择合适的颜色。

步骤2：修改主题字体。单击“变体”选项组中的“其他”按钮，从列表中选择“字体”选项，并从其级联菜单中选择合适的字体。

步骤3：修改主题背景样式。单击“变体”选项组中的“其他”按钮，从列表中选择“背景样式”选项，并从其级联菜单中选择“设置背景格式”选项。

步骤4：修改主题背景样式。单击“变体”选项组中的“其他”按钮，从列表中选择“背景样式”选项，并从其级联菜单中选择“设置背景格式”选项。

步骤5：在“设置背景格式”窗格中单击“应用到全部”按钮。

步骤6：单击“关闭”按钮，关闭窗格，查看修改主题背景样式的效果。（注：可以在“设计”选项卡中单击“主题”选项组中的“其他”按钮，从列表中可以直接更改当前演示文稿的主题。）

主题模板与模板的区别：主题模板可以统一更改颜色、背景，而模板则不可以。

字体搭配

*** 演示文稿的目的是为了展示内容，传达观点，所以文本是演示文稿中不可或缺的，并且在幻灯片中输入文本后还要对其进行各种设置。本节将对文字的选择、文本的输入、文本的编辑、文本段落的设置等操作进行全面介绍。

文字的选择有讲究

字体是演示文稿中必不可少的一个元素，要想 *** 出优秀的演示文稿，选择一种合适的字体很重要。

一、选择合适的字体

一般用户会使用PPT中默认的字体，这样 *** 出来的PPT看起来千篇一律。其实选择一种合适的字体，会起到不—样的效果，用户可以根据不同场合使用不同的字体。

1、普通字体。PPT中用到的绝大多数字体都可归为普通字体。例如，微软雅黑、黑体、华文行楷、汉仪系列等，目前大多数的PPT都经常使用这类字体。

2、钢笔字体。在PPT中使用钢笔字体，例如方正硬笔行书简体、方正硬笔楷书简体等，可以使PPT充满文艺感。这类字体比较适合教育、书籍、文化等领域相关主题内容。

3、书法字体。书法字体很常见，例如日本青柳衡山毛笔字体、段宁毛笔行书、叶根友系列字体等，这类字体适合中国风、水墨风的PPT。

4、卡通字体。卡通字体在视觉上非常可爱，例如华康娃娃体、方正卡通简体、方正胖头鱼简体、汉仪乐窑体等，这类字体适合儿童教学课件或与儿童相关的主题。

5、英文字体。前面几种类型均为中文字体，但在 *** PPT时还会用到英文，那英文字体该怎么选呢?这里将推荐几款常用英文字体，供用户参考。

（1）TimesNewRoman。该字体是系统自带的英文字体，适合历史文化类PPT。

（2）Tahoma。该字体也是系统自带的字体，给人一种亲切感，在一定程度上可以调节现场氛围。

（3）SegoeUILight。该字体比较纤细，使用该字体可以使整个PPT看起来清新自然。

（4）PalaceScriptMT。该字体是装饰性很强的手写体，一般用于文艺、请帖、节日等主题。

提示：在一张幻灯片中，如果中英文同时存在，那么英文字体就要根据中文字体来调整，也就是说两种字体要相互匹配。另外，字体也有版权如果用户将下载的字体用于商业用途，则需要支付版权费。

二、安装字体的 ***

如果用户在网上下载了几款字体，想要进行安装，可以按照以下几种 *** 进行操作：

1、***和粘贴字体。可以全选需要安装的字体，然后按Ctrl+C组合键进行***操作，再按照相应的路径（C：iWindowsl）找到“Fonts”文件夹，打开该文件夹，按Ctrl+V组合键，将***的字体进行粘贴即可。

2、“安装”字体。首先选择需要安装的字体，然后单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“安装”命令即可安装。此外，还可以双击要安装的字体文件，在打开的字体对话框中单击“安装”按钮即可。

3、使用快捷方式安装字体。在需要安装大批量的字体时，为了防止占用系统磁盘空间，影响软件的运行速度，可以使用快捷方式来安装字体，具体操作 *** 如下：

步骤1：根据路径（C：iWindowslFonts）打开“Fonts”文件夹，单击左侧的“字体设置”选项按钮。

步骤2：在打开的“字体设置”界面中，勾选“允许使用快捷方式安装字体（高级）”复选框，单击“确定”按钮，关闭该界面。

步骤3：打开要安装的字体文件夹，全选字体，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“作为快捷方式安装”选项即可。

根据内容输入文本

*** 演示文稿时需要在其中输入文本，然后设置文本的字体、字号、字符间距、文本的特殊效果等操作。

一、输入文本。想要在幻灯片中输入文本，则需要占位符和文本框做载体。介绍两种常见的文本输入 *** ：

1、在占位符中输入文本。幻灯片中的占位符由幻灯片的版式决定，用户可以直接在占位符中输入文本，具体的操作步骤如下：

步骤1：打开演示文稿，将光标定位至需要输入文本的占位符中。

步骤2：选择合适的输入法，直接在占位符中输入文本即可。

2、在文本框中输入文本。需要在幻灯片中添加文本框，然后才能输入文本，具体操作 *** 如下：

步骤1：切换至“插入”选项卡，在“文本”选项组中单击“文本框”下拉按钮，在展开的列表中选择“绘制横排文本框”选项。

步骤2：鼠标光标变为十字形状，按住鼠标左键不放，在页面合适位置拖动鼠标绘制文本框。

步骤3：绘制好后松开鼠标，此时幻灯片中出现一个虚线框，即为文本框，并且光标自动定位至文本框中。

步骤4：在文本框中直接输入文字即可。

二、调整字体字号

在幻灯片中输入文本后，可以对文本的字体、字号进行设置，具体的操作 *** 如下：

步骤1：调整字体。选择需要调整字体的文本框，然后在“开始”选项卡中单击“字体”下拉按钮。

步骤2：从展开的下拉列表中选择“汉仪行楷简”选项。

步骤3：按照同样的 *** 设置其他文本的字体，查看设置的效果。

步骤4：调整字号。选择需要调整字号的文本框，在“字号”文本框中输入“80”。

步骤5：按Enter键确认输入。按照同样的 *** 设置其他文本的字号。

提示：可以选择需要设置颜色的文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“字体颜色”下拉按钮，从列表中选择合适的颜色，即可为所选文本设置颜色。

三、应用文本特殊效果

如果用户想要文本特殊显示，可以为其设置加粗、倾斜、阴影、下划线等效果，下面将介绍具体的操作 *** ：

步骤1：加粗。选择需要加粗的文本，在“开台”选项卡中单击“加粗”按钮即可使文本加粗显示。

步骤2：倾斜。选择文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“倾斜”按钮，即可将文本变倾斜。

步骤3：阴影。选择文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“文字阴影”按钮。

步骤4：下划线。选择文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“下划线”按钮。

步骤5：如果用户想要清除设置的效果，则可以单击“清除所有格式”按钮，可以将所设置的格式效果清除。

编辑输入的文本

在幻灯片中输入文本后，通常还需要对其进行各种编辑，这时就会涉及到对文本的一些基础操作，例如选取文本、移动与***文本、查找和替换等。

一、选取文本

1、选择连续的文本。只需要将光标定位至需要选择文本的开始位置，然后按住鼠标左键不放，拖动鼠标至需要选择文本的结束位置，释放鼠标左键即可。此外，用户也可以将光标定位至需要选择文本的开始位置，然后按住Shift键不放，单击选择文本的结束处，即可将开始到结束处的这段文本内容全部选中。

2、选择单个词语。需要将光标定位至某个词语的任意位置，然后双击鼠标，即可将该词语选中。还可以将光标定位至词语的开始位置，然后按住鼠标左键不放，拖动鼠标至词语的结束位置，释放鼠标左键，即可将该词语选中。

3、选择段落。在选择段落的任意位置处连续单击3次鼠标左键，即可将该段落选中。

4、选择多处不连续的区域。在文档中先使用拖动鼠标的 *** 选择一个文本，然后按住Ctrl键不放，依次选择其他文本，这样就可以将多个不连续的区域选中。

5、选择全部文本。使用快捷键全选文本，只需将光标定位至文本中任意位置，然后按Ctrl+A组合键，即可将文本全部选中。

二、移动和***文本

用户使用移动与***命令，可以减少重复文本的录入，提高工作效率。

1、移动文本。可以使用“剪切”命令移动文本，操作如下：

步骤1：选中需要移动的文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“剪切”按钮。

步骤2：选择需要粘贴文本的幻灯片，然后在“开始”选项卡中单击“粘贴”按钮，文本随即被移动到该幻灯片中。

步骤3：选中文本，然后按住鼠标左键不放，拖动鼠标，即可将其移至幻灯片页面合适位置。

提示：使用快捷键Ctrl+X剪切文本，然后使用Ctrl+V粘贴文本，也可以移动文本。

2、***文本。***文本是将所选内容***到剪贴板，然后粘贴到其他位置，具体操作 *** 如下：

步骤1：选择需要***的文本，然后在“开始”选项卡中单击“***”按钮。

步骤2：选择需要粘贴的幻灯片，单击“粘贴”按钮，即可***选择的文本。

提示：用户也可以选择需要***的文本，按Ctrl+D组合键进行***。

三、查找与替换文本

当演示文稿中出现大量的错误文本时，为了节省时间，可以使用查找和替换功能进行更改，下面将介绍具体的操作 *** ：

1、查找文本。首先要将错误的文本查找出来，具体操作 *** 如下：

步骤1：打开演示文稿，在“开始”选项卡中单击“编辑”选项组的“查找”按钮。

步骤2：打开“查找”对话框，在“查找内容”文本框中输入要查找的文本，这里输入“想要查找的文本内容”，然后单击“查找下一个”按钮。

步骤3：此时，查找到的文本处于选中状态，用户可以确认是否属于录入错误。

步骤4：继续单击“查找下一个”按钮，当查找到最后一个文本时，会弹出提示对话框，提示用户已经查找到最后一个匹配项目，单击“确定”按钮，关闭“查找”对话框即可。

2、替换文本。用户可以逐一替换错误的文本，也可以全部替换，具体的操作 *** 如下：

步骤1：在“开始”选项卡中单击“编辑”选项组的“替换”按钮。

步骤2：打开“替换”对话框，在“查找内容”文本框中输入要查找的文本，然后在“替换为”文本框中输入要替换的文本，单击“查找下一个”按钮。

步骤3：系统随即查找到相匹配的文本，接着单击“替换”按钮，即可将文本进行替换。

步骤4：如果单击“全部替换”按钮，可以一次性将查找到的文本全部替换。

设置文本段落

在幻灯片中输入文本内容后需要对其设置段落格式，这样整个页面才能更加美观，段落格式的设置包括设置段落对齐方式、行及段落间距等。

一、设置段落对齐方式

段落对齐方式是指段落对齐到文本框的方式，包括水平对齐和垂直对齐。下面将介绍如何设置段落的水平对齐方式。

步骤1：选中需要设置对齐方式的文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“居中”按钮。

步骤2：此外，用户还可以在“开始”选项卡中单击“对齐文本”下拉按钮，从列表中选择所需的垂直对齐方式。

二、设置行间距及段落间距

如果一个文本框中包含多个行和段落，为其置合适的行和段落间距，可以使整个幻灯片页看起来更加舒适、美观，下面将介绍如何设置子及段落间距。

1、设置行距。行距是指每一行文字之间的距离，设置行距的操作 *** 如下：

步骤1：选中要设置行距的文本，在“开始”选页卡中单击“行距”下拉按钮。

步骤2：对选中的文本各行之间的间距进行相应的调整。

2、设置段落间距。段落间距是指段落与段落之间的距离，可以设置段前和段后的距离，具体操作 *** 如下：

步骤1：选择需要设置段落间距的文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“段落”选项组的对话框启动器按钮。

步骤2：打开“段落”对话框，在“缩进和间距”选项卡中设置“段前”、“段后”间距，设置完成后单击“确定”按钮。

三、添加项目符号及编号

为文本添加项目符号或编号可使文本内容更有条理性，下面讲解如何添加项目符号及编号。

步骤1：添加项目符号。选中需要添加项目符号的文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“项目符号”下拉按钮，从列表中选择合适的项目符号，这里选择“带填充效果的钻石形项目符号”选项。

步骤2：可以看到选中的文本随即被添加了项目符号。

四、设置文本分栏

步骤1：选择需要分栏的文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“添加或删除栏”下拉按钮。

步骤2：从展开的列表中选择“更多栏”选项。

步骤3：打开“栏”对话框，在“数量”微调框中输入数值“3”，在“间距”微调框中输入数值“0.5”，设置完成后单击“确定”按钮。

步骤4：文本随即被分成3栏，并按照设置调整了各栏之间的间距。

艺术字的妙用

在 *** 幻灯片时使用艺术字可以快速抓住观众的眼球，而且外观多变的艺术字还能为幻灯片增加活泼生动的气息。

步骤1：打开演示文稿，切换至“插入”选项卡，单击“文本”选项组中的“艺术字”下拉按钮，从列表中选择合适的艺术字效果。

步骤2：幻灯片中随即插入一个相应的艺术字文本框，接着在文本框中直接输入内容即可。

美化文本

除了利用艺术字功能来美化文本外，还可以利用文本自带的美化功能，例如设置三维旋转文本、设置路径文本等， *** 出不一样的文字效果。

一、设置三维旋转文本。在PPT中利用“三维旋转”功能可以 *** 透视字体效果，具体操作 *** 如下：

步骤1：选择幻灯片，切换至“插入”选项卡，击“文本”选项组的“文本框”下拉按钮，从表中选择“竖排文本框”选项。绘制一个竖排文本框，并在其中输入文本内容。

步骤2：选中文本。在“开始”选项卡中将“字体”设置为“方正隶书简体”，将“字号”设置为“96”，将“字体颜色”设置为“白色”。

步骤3：选中文本框，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“设置形状格式”命令。

步骤4：打开“设置形状格式”窗格，切换至“效果”选项卡。在“三维旋转”选项组中设置“X旋转”“Y旋转”和“Z旋转”。

步骤5：设置完成后关闭窗格。选中文本框，切换至“绘图工具-格式”选项卡，单击“艺术字样式”选项组的对话框启动器按钮。

步骤6：打开“设置形状格式”窗格，切换至“文本填充与轮廓”选项卡，在“文本填充”选项组中调整“透明度”。

步骤7：调整好后关闭窗格，然后***该文本框，并修改文本框的文字内容，同时调整该文本的字号。

步骤8：选中***的文本框，打开“设置形状格式”窗格。在“效果”选项卡中设置“三维旋转”的“X旋转”“Y旋转”和“Z旋转”。

步骤9：设置完成后关闭窗格，查看 *** 透视字体的效果。

提示：由于透视角度的不同，所以文字位置一旦变化．就需要重新调整参数。

二、设置路径文本

用户可以通过“文字效果”功能来 *** 拱形字体，具体操作 *** 如下：

步骤1：绘制横排文本框并输入文本。

步骤2：选择文本，在“开始”选项卡中将“字体”设置为“汉仪橄榄体简”，将“字号”设置为“44”，将“字体颜色”设置为“深绿色”。

步骤3：切换至“绘图工具-格式”选项卡，单击“文字效果”下拉按钮。

步骤4：从展开的列表中选择“转换”选项，并从其级联菜单中选择“拱形”效果。

步骤5：文字已变形。为了能够与图中地球轮廓相一致，则需对它进行调整。

步骤6：选中文字，将其移至合适的位置后，将光标放在文本框下方的中点上，此时光标变为双向箭头。

步骤7：按住鼠标左键不放，向下拖动鼠标至合适位置，调整文字的弯曲度。

步骤8：调整文字的方向，将光标移动至文字起始处的路径圆点（橙色的圆点）位置，按住鼠标左键不放，拖动该控制点至合适位置，可调整文字路径。

步骤9：对路径进行反复调整后，查看效果。

步骤10：改变“心”和“家”文字的“字号”和“颜色”。查看 *** 拱形文字的效果。

提示：将路径圆点向下拖动时，文字会随着路径适当放大；相反，将路径圆点向上拖动时，文字会随之缩小。

图片 *** 攻略

PPT中如果只有文字，则会显得枯燥乏味。而使用图文结合的模式更能吸引观众的注意力，所以图片在幻灯片中起着重要的作用。选择一张好的图片，会使PPT更加出彩。本章将对图片的选择、插入和编辑操作进行全面介绍。

图片选择 ***

在 *** 幻灯片时，用户通常不清楚使用什么样的图片比较合适，其实图片的选择也有技巧。选择合适的图片不仅能在内容上契合主题，也会使页面更美观。下面就介绍在选择图片时需要注意的几点问题：

一、选择高清的图片

高清的图片能给人视觉上的享受，如果图片模糊不清，不仅看起来很粗糙，而且容易使观众产生视觉疲劳。

二、选择与内容相关的图片

在 *** PPT时，要选择和幻灯片中内容相关的图片，或与主题相关的图片，这样便于观众的理解。

三、选择与PPT风格相关的图片

除了注意以上两点以外，用户还要注意选择的图片是否符合当前PPT的风格。PPT可分为以下4种风格。

1、严肃沉稳。此类风格的PPT，大多以写实图片为主，并且细节丰富，光影变化细腻，给人一种沉稳、可信感。

2、轻松幽默。此类风格的PPT，主要以搞怪的表情或动作图片为主，这样可以增加幻灯片的趣味性。

3、诗情画意。此类型的PPT没有明确的主题，主要以浪漫、清新或怀旧类图片为主，以渲染主题气氛。

4、另类独特。此类PPT一般都以创意性很强的图片或者以绘制的图案为主，也可以两者结合，给人独树一帜的感觉。

好图片的搜索 ***

有人说使用“百度”搜索到的图片其质量参差不齐，不好挑选。其实不然，有这种想法的人是因为他们没有找对 *** 。下面就向用户推荐几种搜索图片的 *** 。

一、提炼搜索关键字。输入关键字即可。例如搜索“时间飞逝”类的图片，输入“时间”关键字。而如果输入“时间匆匆”关键字后，搜索的结果就大相径庭。

二、组合词搜索法。有时候单凭一个关键词搜索出来的图片范围太广，想要从中找到符合的图片很费劲，这时可以试着将几个关键词组合在一起进行搜索，限制搜索条件，这样搜索出来的图片会更精准一些。

三、联想词搜索法。有时使用关键词和组合词都搜索不出满意的图片，尤其是搜索一些偏理念或概念化的内容，很难找到对应的图片，这时可以尝试联想词搜索。将抽象的概念具体化，这需要用户发散思维来联想。例如，想要寻找关于“探索”的图片，则可以用“宇宙”关键字进行搜索。用户也可以搜索“望远”，对远方的未知，也能激发人们去探索。

提示：图片也有版权，如果将图片用于商业用途，则需要支付版权费，使用时需要谨慎。

在文中插入图片

一、插入本机图片

在 *** 幻灯片前，通常会先搜集相关图片，将满意的图片保存在电脑中，然后在 *** 时将这些图片插入到幻灯片中。

步骤1：打开演示文稿，切换至“插入”选项卡，单击“图像”选项组中的“图片”按钮。

步骤2：打开“插入图片”对话框，在“桌面”找到保存的图片，然后单击“插入”按钮。

步骤3：选中的图片随即***入到幻灯片中。

步骤4：将光标移至图片右下角的控制点上，按住鼠标左键不放，拖动鼠标调整图片的大小。

步骤5：将光标置于图片上方，按住鼠标左键不放，拖动鼠标将其移至页面合适位置。

二、插入屏幕截图

用户可以使用屏幕截图功能，将在桌面上打开的网页或其他内容捕捉下来的图片插入到幻灯片中，下面介绍具体的操作 *** 。

步骤1：选择幻灯片，在“插入”选项卡中单击“图像”选项组中的“屏幕截图”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“屏幕剪辑”选项。

步骤2：屏幕随即变为模糊状态，按住鼠标左键不放，在打开的网页上拖动鼠标，截取所需的部分图像，此时被选取的区域会变得清晰。

步骤3：选取完成后松开鼠标，此时选取的部分图像就***入到了幻灯片中，最后调整图片的大小和位置即可。

修饰图片

在图片插入到幻灯片后，用户还可以对其进行各种设置，例如更改图片的颜色、样式、外观，或裁剪图片等，使图片更加契合幻灯片页面。下面将分别对其进行详细介绍。

一、更改图片的颜色

如果用户对图片的颜色不满意，可以对其进行更改。

步骤1：选择图片，切换至“图片工具-格式”选项卡，单击“颜色”下拉按钮。

步骤2：在展开列表的“色调”区域，选择“色温：8800K”选项，可以看到选中的图片已经被修改为相应的颜色。

二、更改图片的亮度/对比度

用户可以根据需要调整图片的亮度与对比度。下面以将图片更改为“亮度：+40%对比度：-40%”为例，介绍具体的操作 *** 。

步骤1：选中图片，在“图片工具-格式”选项卡中单击“校正”下拉按钮。

步骤2：从展开的列表中选择“亮度：+40%对比度：-40%”选项，选中图片的亮度和对比度随即进行相应的调整。

三、设置图片的艺术效果

用户可以为图片添加艺术效果，使图片更具有艺术气息。下面以为图片添加“纹理化”艺术效果为例，介绍具体的操作 *** 。

步骤1：选中图片，在“图片工具-格式”选项卡中单击“艺术效果”下拉按钮。

步骤2：从展开的列表中选择“蜡笔平滑”选项，选中的图片随即应用了该艺术效果。

提示：用户可以在“艺术效果”下拉列表中选择“艺术效果选项”选项，打开“设置图片格式”窗格，在“艺术效果”选项组中可以设置“透明度”和“缩放”选项来调整运用的艺术效果。

四、设置图片样式

PPT内置了很多图片样式，用户可以根据需要设置相应的图片样式。下面以将图片的样式设置为“简单框架，白色”为例，介绍具体的操作 *** 。

步骤1：选择图片，在“图片工具-格式”选项卡中单击“快速样式”按钮。

步骤2：从展开的列表中选择“简单框架，白色”选项，选中的图片随即应用该样式。

五、对图片进行裁剪

当幻灯片中的图片尺寸过大时，为了不影响整体美观，用户可以对其进行裁剪。下面以将图片裁剪成“心形”为例，向用户介绍图片的裁剪操作。

步骤1：选中需要裁剪的图片，在“图片工具-格式”选项卡中单击“裁剪”下拉按钮。

步骤2：从展开的列表中选择“裁剪为形状”选项，并从其级联菜单中选择合适的形状，这里选择“心形”选项。选中的图片随即被裁剪成心形。

六、删除图片背景

PPT还具有一些简单的图片处理功能，例如“抠图”功能，即将图片的背景删除，下面介绍具体的操作 *** 。

步骤1：选中图片，切换至“图片工具-格式”选项卡，在“调整”选项组中单击“删除背景”按钮。

步骤2：功能区左侧新增一个“背景消除”选项卡，图片周围出现8个控制点，并且背景变为紫色。

步骤3：将光标移到下方中间的控制点上，按住鼠标左键向下拖动鼠标，调整保留的区域。

步骤4：若调整控制点后仍有一部分不在保留区域，则可以单击“标记要保留的区域”按钮。

步骤5：鼠标光标变为笔样式，然后单击鼠标标记要保留的区域。

步骤6：标记完成后，单击“保留更改”按钮。可以看到图片的背景已经被删除，只保留了主体部分。

提示：若用户需要删除多余的标记，则可以单击“删除标记”按钮，此时该按钮处于选中状态，然后在多余的标记上单击鼠标左键，即可将其删除，删除完成后再次单击“删除标记”按钮退出即可。

表格与图表

用户在 *** 分析类演示文稿时，可以使用表格来对数据进行分析和管理，在幻灯片中插入表格的 *** 有多种，如插入固定行和列的表格、插入指定表格、插入Excel表格等，本节将对其进行详细介绍。

在PPT中插入表格

一、插入固定行数、列数的表格

在“表格”列表中滑动鼠标，可以直接插入表格，但最多只能创建8行10列之内的表格。

步骤1：选择幻灯片，切换至“插入”选项卡，单击“表格”下拉按钮，在展开的列表中滑动鼠标，选取8行10列的表格。

步骤2：选取完成后单击鼠标，即可插入。

步骤3：调整表格的大小和位置，然后在其中输入数据即可。

二、插入指定的表格

如果之一种 *** 满足不了需求，还可以通过对话框插入表格，具体操作 *** 如下：

步骤1：选择幻灯片，切换至“插入”选项卡，单击“表格”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“插入表格”选项。

步骤2：打开“插入表格”对话框，输入“列数”和“行数”数值，单击“确定”按钮。幻灯片中随即插入一个5列10行的表格。

步骤3：调整表格的大小和位置，输入数据内容即可。

对表格进行编辑

在插入表格后，用户可以根据需要对表格进行编辑，例如设置文本对齐方式、调整行高和列宽、拆分或合并单元格等，下面将分别对其进行详细介绍。

一、设置文本对齐方式

步骤1：选中表格，切换至“表格工具-布局”选项卡，在“对齐方式”选项组中单击“居中”按钮。可以看到表格中的文本内容已经水平居中显示。

步骤2：在“对齐方式”选项组中单击“垂直居中”按钮。可以看到表格中的文本内容已经垂直居中显示。

提示：用户也可以在“开始”选项卡中单击“段落”选项组中的“居中”按钮，将文本设置为水平居中。单击“对齐文本”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“中部对齐”选项，可以将文本设置为垂直居中显示。

二、调整行高和列宽

在表格中输入数据后，因为数据类型的差异，所以需要调整某行或某列的高度和宽度，使表格看起来更美观、协调。下面将介绍表格行高和列宽的调整操作：

步骤1：调整列宽。将光标移至需要调整列宽的列右侧边线上，光标变为双箭头形状。

步骤2：按住鼠标左键不放，拖动鼠标，光标下方出现一条虚线。

步骤3：拖动鼠标将虚线移到合适位置后松开，可以调整列宽。按照同样的 *** ，调整其他列的宽度。

三、拆分或合并单元格

为了使表格中的数据能够合理分布，用户需要对单元格进行合并或拆分，下面介绍具体的操作 *** ：

步骤1：合并单元格。选中需要合并的单元格区域，切换至“表格工具-布局”选项卡，单击“合并单元格”按钮。选中的单元格区域随即被合并成一个单元格。按照同样的 *** ，合并其他单元格区域。

步骤3：拆分单元格。选中需要拆分的单元格，在“布局”选项卡中单击“拆分单元格”按钮。打开“拆分单元格”对话框，在“列数”和“行数”微调框中输入数值，单击“确定”按钮。

对表格进行美化

在幻灯片中创建的表格是自带表格样式的。如果想要更改表格样式，使其看起来更加美观，则可以使用内置样式美化表格，或自定义表格样式。

一、使用表格内置样式

步骤1：选中表格，切换至“表格工具-设计”选项卡，单击“表格样式”选项组中的“其他”按钮。

步骤2：从展开的列表中选择合适的表格样式，可以选择“中度样式3-强调6”选项，可以看到表格应用了所选的样式。

提示：如果用户想要清除应用的表格样式，则可以在“表格样式”下拉列表中选择“清除表格”选项即可。

二、自定义表格样式

如果内置的表格样式无法满足需求，则可以自定义表格样式。例如，设置表格的边框、底纹等，下面对其进行详细介绍。

步骤1：选中表格，在“表格工具-设计”选项卡中单击“绘制边框”选项组中的“笔划粗细”下拉按钮。

步骤2：从展开的列表中选择“3.0磅”选项。

步骤3：在“绘制边框”选项组中单击“笔颜色”下拉按钮，从列表中选择合适的颜色。

提示：在幻灯片中，用户还可以使用图表来展示数据，它使复杂的数据关系变得可视化、形象化，并且增强了幻灯片的感染力。

图表另类画法

如果用户觉得创建的图表千篇一律，不能引起观众的兴趣，则可以在基础图表上增加一点创意，这样图表就能变得妙趣横生，让人眼前一亮。

用户可以使用图片填充功能， *** 出创意条形图，下面介绍具体的操作步骤：

步骤1：在“插入”选项卡中单击“图表”按钮，打开“插入图表”对话框，选择“条形图”选项，并在右侧选择“簇状条形图”类型，单击“确定”按钮。

步骤2：在打开的Excel电子表格中输入相关数据，单击“关闭”按钮。

步骤3：幻灯片中随即创建一个簇状条形图。选中条形图，在“设计”选项卡中单击“添加图表元素”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“坐标轴→主要横坐标轴”选项，隐藏横坐标轴。

步骤4：在“添加图表元素”下拉列表中选择“网格线→主轴主要垂直网格线”选项，隐藏图表的网格线。

步骤5：选中垂直坐标轴，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“设置坐标轴格式”命令。

步骤6：弹出“设置坐标轴格式”窗格，切换至“坐标轴选项”选项卡，在“刻度线”选项组中单击“主刻度线类型”右侧的下拉按钮，从列表中选择“无”选项。

步骤7：关闭窗格，查看设置的效果。

步骤8：选中“步行”系列数据点，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“设置数据点格式”命令。

步骤9：打开“设置数据点格式”窗格，切换至“填充与线条”选项卡，在“填充”组中选中“图片或纹理填充”单选按钮，然后单击下方的“文件”按钮。

步骤10：打开“插入图片”对话框，选择合适的图片，然后单击“插入”按钮。

步骤11：此时，可以看到图片被填充到被选中的柱形中，但该图片已严重变形。

步骤12：再次打开“设置数据点格式”窗格，在“填充”选项组中选中“层叠”单选按钮。

步骤13：此时，可以看到填充的图片恢复到原来的比例。

步骤14：按照同样 *** ，填充其他系列数据点，并删除图例，输入图表标题，添加数据标签等。

步骤15：选中图表，在“格式”选项卡中单击“形状样式”选项组中的“形状填充”下拉按钮，从列表中选择合适的填充颜色。

步骤16：查看设置好簇状条形图的最终效果。

添加音频视频

声音的插入与调整

在 *** 演示文稿的过程中，特别是在 *** 商务方面的宣传演示文稿时，可以为幻灯片添加一些合适的声音，添加的声音可以配合图文，使演示文稿变得有声有色，更具感染力。

一、常见的音频格式

PPT中常用WAV、MP3和MIDI等格式。

（1）WAV格式。WAV格式是Microsoft公司开发的一种声音文件格式，用于保存Windows平台的音频信息资源，被Windows平台及其应用程序所支持，支持多种音频位数、采样频率和声道，是目前计算机上广为流行的声音文件格式，几乎所有的音频编辑软件都识别WAV格式。

（2）MP3格式。MP3格式诞生于20世纪80年代的德国，所谓的MP3是指MPEG标准中的音频部分，也就是MPEG音频层。MPEG音频文件的压缩是一种有损压缩，牺牲了声音文件中的12kHz~16kHz之间高音频部分的质量来压缩文件的大小。相同时间的音乐文件，用MP3格式存储，一般只有WAV文件的1/10，而音质要次于CD格式或WAV格式声音文件。

（3）MIDI格式。MIDI即音乐设备数字接口（MusicalInstrumentDigitalInterface）的英文缩写，是20世纪80年代初为解决电声乐器之间的通信问题而提出的。MIDI传输的不是声音信号，而是音符、控制参数等指令、MIDI文件本身并不包含波形数据，所以MIDI文件非常小巧，非常适合作为网页的背景音乐。

二、添加各类声音

添加文件中的声音就是将计算机中已存在的声音插人到演示文稿中，也可以从其他的声音文件中添加用户需要的声音。具体 *** 如下：

（1）打开“XXX.pptx”，切换至“插入”面板，在“媒体”选项组中单击“音频”的下三角按钮，在弹出的列表框中选择“PC上的音频”选项。

（2）弹出“插入音频”对话框，选择素材文件夹下的“bgmusicl.mp3”声音文件，单击“插入”按钮。

（3）执行操作后，可以拖曳声音图标至合适位置，按〈F5〉键后幻灯片播放，单击播放按钮就可以听到插入的声音。

（4）选择音频文件，执行“音频格式”→“播放”命令，打开“播放”面板，设置“开始”为“单击时”，按〈F5〉键后幻灯片播放，音乐将自动播放。

设置声音属性

打开PowerPoint，选择需要插入的音频文件，切换至“音频格式”→“播放”面板，可设置音频的相关播放属性。

添加视频

PowerPoint2013中的视频包括视频和动画，可以在幻灯片中插入的视频格式有十几种，PowerPoint支持的视频格式会随着媒体播放器的不同而不同，用户可从剪辑管理器或从外部文件添加视频。

一、常见的视频格式

PPT中常插入的视频格式包括AVI、WMV、MPEG、MOV及SWF等。

（1）AVI格式。AVI格式即音频视频交错格式（AudioVideoInterleaved）的英文缩写，是Microsoft公司开发的一种视频文件格式。所谓音频视频交错，是指可以将视频和音频交织在一起进行同步播放。这种视频格式的优点是图像质量好，可以跨平台使用；缺点是体积过于庞大，而且压缩标准不统一，时常会出现视频编码原因而造成视频不能播放等问题。用户如果遇到了这些问题，可以通过下载相应的解码器来解决。

（2）MOV格式。MOV即QuickTime影片格式，它是Apple公司开发的一种音频、视频文件格式，用于存储常用数字媒体类型。

（3）MPEG格式。MPEG即运动图像专家组格式（MovingPictureExpertGroup）的英文缩写，日常生活中用户欣赏的VCD、DVD就是这种格式，今天常用的有MP4格式。

（4）WMV格式。WMV即视窗媒体视频（Window***ediaVideo）的英文缩写，是Microsoft公司推出的一种采用独立编码方式并且可以直接在网上实时观看的视频文件压缩格式。

（5）SWF格式。SWF（ShockWaveFlash）是ADOBE公司的动画设计软件Flash的专用格式，是一种支持矢量和点阵图形的动画文件格式，被广泛应用于网页设计、动画 *** 等领域，SWF文件通常也被称为Flash文件。

二、添加文件中的视频

添加文件中的视频就是将计算机中已存在的视频插人到演示文稿中。具体 *** 如下：

（1）打开“视频的使用.pptx”文件，切换至“插入”面板，在“媒体”选项组中单击“视频”的下三角按钮，在弹出的列表框中选择“PC上的视频”选项。

（2）弹出“插入视频”对话框，选择素材文件夹下的“视频样例.wmv”声音文件，单击“插人”按钮。

（3）执行操作后，可以拖曳声音图标至合适位置，按〈FS〉键后幻灯片播放，单击播放按钮即可播放视频。

三、设置视频属性

在幻灯片中选中插入的视频，切换至“播放”面板，其中“视频选项”选项组中的各页与“音频”选项组中的各选项作用类似，用户可根据需要设置各选项。

打开PowerPoint2013，选择需要插入的视频文件，切换至“视频工具”→“格式”，可设置视频的相关格式属性。

动画设置 ***

人类对运动与变化具有天生的敏感。不管这个运动有多么微不足道，变化多么微小，都会强烈地抓住人们的视线。PPT动画的根本在于因内容而变化。对内容的表现力越强，动画效果就越成功。

动画的分类

在PowerPoint中，所谓动画效果主要分为进入动画、强调动画、退出动画和动作路径动画四类，此外，还包括幻灯片切换动画，从而实现了用户对幻灯片中的文本、图形、表格等对象添加不同的动画效果。

一、进入动画。进入动画是对象从“无”到“有”。在触发动画之前，被设置为“进人”动画的对象是不出现的，在触发之后，那它或它们采用何种方式出现，就是“进入”动画要解决的问题。比如设置对象为“进入”动画中的“擦除”效果，可以实现对象从某--方向一点点地出现的效果。进入动画PPT中一般都是使用绿色图标标识。

二、强调动画。强调动画是对象从“有”到“有”，前面的“有”是对象的初始状态，后面的“有”是对象的变化状态。两个状态的变化，起到了对对象强调突出的目的。比如设置对象为“强调动画”中的“变大/变小”效果，可以实现对象从小到大（或设置从大到小）的变化过程，从而产生强调的效果。进入动画PPT中一般都是使用黄色图标标识。

三、退出动画。退出动画与进入动画正好相反，它可以使对象从“有”到“无”。触发后的动画效果与“进入”效果正好相反，对象在没有触发动画之前，是存在屏幕上，而当其被触发后，则从屏幕上以某种设定的效果消失。如设置对象为退出动画中的“切出”效果，则对象在触发后会逐渐地从屏幕上某处切出，从而消失在屏幕上。退出动画PPT中一般都是使用红色图标标识。

四、动作路径动画。就是对象沿着某条路径运动的动画，在PPT中也可以 *** 出同样的效果，就是将对象设置成“动作路径”效果。比如设置对象为“动作路径”中的“向右”效果，则对象在触发后会沿着设定的方向线移动。

动画的操控 ***

选择设置动画的对象，在“动画窗格”中，选择一个动画，单击右边的下拉箭头，弹出的下拉菜单。单击“计时”选项中的“开始”按钮，会弹出下拉列表框。

一、单击开始。只有在多单击一次鼠标之后该动画才会出现。例如想要让两个对象逐一顺序显示，单击一次出现一个，再单击一次再出现一个，那么两个出现动作都应该选择“单击开始”动作选项。

二、从上一项开始。该动作会和上一个动作同时开始。例如把之一个对象设置为“单击开始”，第二个对象设置为“从上一项开始”，那么单击一次之后，两个对象的动画会同时进行。

三、从上一项之后开始。上一动画执行完之后该动作就会自动执行。对于两个对象，如果第二个对象选择了这个选项，那么只需单击一次，两个对象的动画就会先后逐一进行。

四、效果选项。单击会打开“效果”选项卡。在这里，可以对动作的属性进行调整。对于不同的动作，此选项卡的内容会有些差别。

最后是给各位职场人士的提示，千万不要为了追求PPT的美观而忽略了其内容的重要性，建议在掌握PPT设计技能前，将重点放在内容表达上，利用常规的PPT操作做出满足职场要求的作品才是正道。

%3Chowto_content%3E[{"type":"paragraph","attrs":{"is_abstract":true},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"为什么这个幻灯片背景不能修改?如何取消幻灯片的自动播放?","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"……这些问题经常被职场小白问起。这篇适合PPT小白快速入门的实用教程，目的是让读者学会、掌握、应用PPT，达到知其然并知其所以然。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKOoCgWy2s0OMecOun5J *** g"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncCycMAUQGIuOq0CNT1ibEh"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"初识PPT","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkiM6GQIqosIo61E2J3Xxef"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT是Office办公组件中的一个软件。使用PPT创作的文件叫演示文稿，可以在投影仪或电脑上进行播放，也可将演示文稿打印出来，供他人浏览阅读。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2souogkOMiw0IQnH81UTVn"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"一般情况下，大众喜爱的PPT通常都有一些相同的特点：内容准确清晰，版式简洁大方，动画则恰到好处。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqWwc6Wc26CAUW8SoYfLt5X"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、内容准确清晰。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"PPT主要负责传递信息，所以需要严密的逻辑框架作为支撑。因此，通过看PPT的内容逻辑是否准确、清晰，就可以判断PPT是好还是坏。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnU4McACmiE0GMQ9G4GkYzmh"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":918,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"初识PPT","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/e6cd498e04b7487fadd68825cd1a3965","width":1589},"text":"","id":"doxcnAYkIK4OiuIWma0WBsjVh3f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、版式简洁大方。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"PPT是用来传达观点的，所以不需要 *** 得太过复杂。一些初学者喜欢将各种各样的元素都放入PPT中，结果作品的效果却不尽如人意，观众也很难在杂乱无章的版式中获取演讲者所要表达的观点。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0w8Ao8KYS6sUKsQaXKb9Bb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":866,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"初识PPT","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/e297d4212a404b068699b5721c92f529","width":1536},"text":"","id":"doxcnig6yuuYM***wkWcv9hdWnBe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"动画恰到好处。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"在PPT中恰到好处的动画会起到锦上添花的作用，多余复杂的动画则容易喧宾夺主。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoeca8EKGgaMcUhs5UnOd8d"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1076,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"初识PPT","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/1551ba1233d34871b7a583428b78e6a6","width":1916},"text":"","id":"doxcnAgYo044cyaUwasHxuagvKd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6yQsa02CYsEU2rlPEN3ULb"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的结构","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAo6Gk6qUe0YuOTBsKfZ90D"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、PPT的操作界面","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnE4GaY0gqoQS***qy6wNvgub"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT的操作界面主要包括标题栏、功能区、编辑区、文件菜单、视图区和状态栏。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncqiee4mMM8gUot8OoU0DVe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、标题栏。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"标题栏位于页面的最顶部，从左至右依次是快速访问工具栏、演示文稿名称、登录按钮、功能区显示选项按钮、最小化按钮、更大化按钮和关闭按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2AOkUg0SoG4E0QyG5Zi8hf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1030,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的结构","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/d287aa1362434221a602036b6e02484c","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnmciYGEOC82Ayyebpq5D2sz"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、功能区。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"功能区位于标题栏下方，默认包含8个选项卡，每个选项卡中包含多个选项组，相同类别的命令通常集中在同一个选项组中。同一个选项卡中包含的命令按钮也属于同一种类型。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngIgwY08WamqcY5WsTRSHRe"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1033,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的结构","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/1619bd1d72d146eb8e146085750ace03","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcn400eMsuSEu2oc9IAytHSzg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"下面详细介绍一下各选项卡的功能。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMSkoMC2QKgwOQNJZc9ocnh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（1）“开始”选项卡。该选项卡中包括“剪贴板”“幻灯片”“字体”“段落”“绘图”和“编辑”6个选项组。在此，用户可以新建幻灯片，设置幻灯片的文本、段落以及样式等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOwegsCEqMoUWg78WEKS8tg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（2）“插入”选项卡。该选项卡包括“幻灯片”“表格”“图像”“插图”“加载项”“链接”“批注”“文本”“符号”及“媒体”选项组。在此，用户可以在幻灯片中插入各种表格、图片、超链接、文本框、公式、音像等元素。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUqGQeE2Ye24mCeFP6ZDANe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（3）“设计”选项卡。该选项卡包括：“主题”“变体”“自定义”选项组。在此，用户可以对幻灯片的大小、背景格式等进行设置。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUE4ymcwGqauwwNIhfs8V8d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（4）“切换”选项卡。该选项卡包括“预览”“切换到此幻灯片”“计时”选项组。在此，用户可以为幻灯片设置各种切换效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniCieeQoyCMmeyaIuoLknsg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（5）“动画”选项卡。该选项卡包括“预览”“动画”“高级动画”和“计时”选项组。在此，用户可以为其文本、图片等添加各种动画效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSy2EgOIGsCegGEvVGpQh7c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（6）“幻灯片放映”选项卡。该选项卡包括“开始放映幻灯片”“设置”“监视器”选项组。在此，用户可以对幻灯片的放映参数进行设置。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnM***U6YqG8QU2GcEvFh6qLb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（7）“审阅”选项卡。该选项卡包括“校对”“语言”“比较”“墨迹”选项组。在此，用户可以对文字进行批注、检索、字体的简繁转换等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnogosEcQcI6oCeQOs1ShWch"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（8）“视图”选项卡。该选项卡包括“演示文稿视图”“母版视图”“显示”“显示比例”“窗口”和“宏”选项组。在此，用户可以设置幻灯片的视图模式、显示标尺和网格线等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneQ8gsGo4UecCK0v40ajkbe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、编辑区。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"编辑区位于整个页面的中心位置，是演示文稿的工作区域。用户可以在编辑区内输入文字、插入图片、绘制图形等。编辑区的显示比例可以根据需要自由放大或缩小。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6qeeasK0CEs444bmvpPaNc"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1032,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的结构","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/9ee8de07e30943f99597148de1f90544","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnGuG2mY06eqWyC6mzMhAKVh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"4、“文件”菜单。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"单击界面左上角的“文件”菜单按钮，可以打开“文件”菜单，该菜单中包含“信息”“新建”“打开”“保存”“另存为”“打印”“共享”“导出”“关闭”“帐户”等12个选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcny0oY4eu6UcYU8zfCZS8EFh"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1031,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的结构","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/4ced84117a89472c9c081d58587fcf92","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcneOEm6SyWKgmqKa *** UuKjRd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"5、","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"状态栏。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"状态栏位于界面更底部，从左到右依次显示的命令有“幻灯片页数”“当前显示页码”“拼写检索”按钮、“语言”“备注”按钮、“批注”按钮、“视图”按钮、“幻灯片放映”按钮、“视图缩放栏”等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMgIAgaaYYqImaryleEmWn3"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1039,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的结构","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/fe63ca377d6d47fdbf92835c6c8d1d30","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnawwMqISOoiuuquQBX4***Td"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、完整的PPT构成","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2gYkSkcEMe062maSA7oXfb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"一份完整的PPT包含5部分，分别为标题页、目录页、过渡页、内容页和结尾页，下面将分别对其进行详细介绍。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwMUGmo6Qk6G0muv0eaW3Zc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、标题页。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"标题页决定观众的之一印象，如果标题页设计不好，则很难吸引观众的眼球。标题页可以是图片+文字的形式，也可以是纯文字形式。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKCoIWi8EC6kw4OywH2UOZd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（1）图片+文字。以图片为主的标题页，具有较强的感染力，如果再加上富有震撼力的标题文字，那就更容易吸引观众的视线了。这种形式的标题页需要注意的一个问题是所选的图片一定要是高清图片。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnY06QMiW4e0mIsV7IiRRMFf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":852,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的结构","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/8b8a529a197c4cccb41cc6fff1fa6d23","width":1523},"text":"","id":"doxcnOMQgeKq0KsQECIswu6ovBg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（2）纯文字。纯文字的标题页，需要考虑排版问题。建议初学者尽量不要尝试。有时为了避免页面版式空洞，可以适当添加一些形状来修饰。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyyAiMu0UKeMm***LmFS0Dgh"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":804,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的结构","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/b7effa57376147479302c8a4a537f061","width":1624},"text":"","id":"doxcncYw2KiCQsiESOg7ISv9Mtc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、目录页。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"一般情况下，目录页紧随标题页之后。目录页可让观众了解PPT的大致内容。目录页的表现形式有多种，下面将分别对其进行介绍。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqmG0oY6***aSQcR3xY0kAAg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（1）利用形状。目录页简洁明了，能突出重点即可，所以使用形状是不错的选择。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnu28YggyeeesqqSQ7gpCcfe"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":880,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的结构","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/f841b4e738cd473f9789c36547e73d11","width":1621},"text":"","id":"doxcnmUIk0Gk8yUaKikF4unoOPg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（2）利用PNG图标。使用图标，可以帮助观众更好地记忆内容，并且看起来简洁清爽，不会喧宾夺主。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoAykwUkg40YgWUVg2VWwRg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":919,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的结构","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/290e1a45028643bdbe488b63bac7a7b0","width":1582},"text":"","id":"doxcniiIWUSsO4CO0iU3aJzhWSc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（3）利用图片。将目录与图片结合起来，能有效打破页面的平淡无奇，给人眼前一亮的感觉。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwWYKgAECCE0yMBcB3sQiBg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":878,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的结构","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/0806f0478b8b4c8aa5a40edb9e590679","width":1625},"text":"","id":"doxcnEs4YkOqKOW4qCUElpOlkXf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、过渡页。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"如果PPT的页数较多，可以在其中添加过渡页，这样可以给观众一个短暂的休息时间。当然如果PPT的页数较少，就没有必要添加了，可以根据实际情况而定。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuIsaASIwQeyQcd0jHzEI2b"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":914,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的结构","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/d630a349cc7841e6aea882afcfd05a2b","width":1583},"text":"","id":"doxcnCY20QUACSsQqkdnWhjvyZc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"4、内容页。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"内容页是整个PPT中必不可少的，也是最重要的一部分，多以图文结合的页面形式来传达内容。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQaW46kUYuUMOA525y9fjxe"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":806,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的结构","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/1e018a97d5f243818ff465f23b7769ee","width":1588},"text":"","id":"doxcnuaICgw2We26kCGRJd0Wddg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"5、结尾页。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"结束页可以写一些激励性或感谢性的文字，或是表达美好祝愿的话语。同时要注意与PPT的整体风格相呼应。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuc22yaey4CgS46lBycsRVd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":879,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的结构","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/8e6ffecd4f3342fd9667584a05bfd9fe","width":1624},"text":"","id":"doxcnMUMOuUYY4akEWCyB7abH9c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、PPT与幻灯片的关系","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcni2CGiIKiWIS2eusne4MDOc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT又叫演示文稿，格式后缀为.ppt、.pptx。演示文稿中的每一页就叫幻灯片，每张幻灯片都是演示文稿中既相互独立又相互联系的内容。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAEwM2oQgoCoogTdRUPkYyg"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT的基本操作","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKYAumSUOqqkAwvb2vnIgIg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"对PPT结构有所了解后，接下来就要了解一下PPT的基本操作了。PPT的基本操作包括创建演示文稿、保存演示文稿、打开和关闭演示文稿、查看演示文稿等，下面分别对其进行详细介绍。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCGAQCMWC0Coe2TxNeiv7jh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、轻松创建文稿","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmoG0sOauU0OS2fpp81A2Jh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"创建PPT的 *** 有多种，下面以创建模板PPT为例，向用户介绍具体的操作 *** 。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIEg2KiImEOoooL7k2NbXAf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：双击PowerPoint应用程序快捷图标，启动软件，在打开界面右侧的搜索框中输入需要搜索模板的类型，然后单击“开始搜索”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYmGqyg4aCWcIcrQzRAZUuf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1031,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/5a036c4fa0a847f384958bf35a442860","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcn4UY88oUQaIwEWyA *** Xo9ve"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：随即在新建界面中显示出所有搜索到的模板，单击选择需要的模板。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWcuSUQOAaMISchr5Wl6Hph"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1030,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/28f770c23dcc41509852167e21befc3b","width":1919},"text":"","id":"doxcnaiwoIqwq8ySCo1704NUJih"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：弹出模板详情窗口，接着单击“创建”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwMCYiKSCCYQ2sZDTcvafkf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1034,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/33cc40088a1b433498e403d0545c27c4","width":1918},"text":"","id":"doxcnsqI0w2g40KCIiQtY8QvRRc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：系统开始下载该模板，下载完成后会自动打开该模板，即可创建一个模板PPT。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWic***K6oU8CkYG1Edd6Ppb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1029,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/a2f938309ec943b3947a8985116ce90f","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnIIgSo6cCos8E4sl0pT8X0d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"保存与另存为","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2GaAkiCIgkAAorFNWke1Eg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在创建演示文稿后，需要将其保存，以免因为意外断电或电脑死机，而造成文件内容丢失。在创建演示文稿后，如果用户是之一次执行保存操作，则可以按照以下 *** 进行保存。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGuwqOsQOI8ocExIBQhUPLe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：在演示文稿界面，单击“文件”菜单按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuuImIuA4mMOoAvYOFAybRd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1035,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/ea2f33a292e845faa712ebc3cb43767a","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnieCYqmuAQiWmGmW44sqvGd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：在打开的“文件”菜单窗口中选择“另存为”选项，在右侧选择“浏览”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcna24acOAcSiKgWioDnfNyah"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1033,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/a85d8e49547a4f8ab3f1e9e22cdf013f","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnUO8seOoi6ugSyOGLnRdh8g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：打开“另存为”对话框，从中选择保存的位置，修改“文件名”，单击“保存”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYQKmSo68MQAGQZ5Jm2Dlug"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1031,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/32b3d6bf64fd4646932edcb9881e03ea","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnsSKAGGKGIS6KuMkSkfxRqe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：返回演示文稿，此时可以看到，标题栏中即显示修改后的演示文稿的名称。当用户执行保存操作后，若对演示文稿进行了修改和编辑，直接单击“保存”按钮即可对其保存。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyqEY26mukUuoYR7AZu1Vob"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、打开与关闭操作","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwg6m2omQA40SI35xBaqbOf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"打开演示文稿的操作 *** 其实很简单，除了双击文件图标外，还可以按照以下几种 *** 进行操作。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnksSS2mawwwcCcZnykzMwNd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（1）右键打开法。打开文件所在的文件夹，单击选中需要打开的演示文稿，然后单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“打开”命令，即可打开所选的演示文稿。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnsQIm6k8uEy2SYZzX1f1jSd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（2）打开计算机中的演示文稿。还可以利用已打开的演示文稿选择计算机中的其他演示文稿，具体操作如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEQCkKkGQUSUSUf9M1RVVJc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：在打开的演示文稿中单击“文件”菜单按钮。（也可以通过","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"Ctrl+O快捷键","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"打开计算机中的演示文稿，这种 *** 更加方便快捷。）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSOQWEoymoKIoKapFgTJ83c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：进入“文件”菜单，选择“打开”选项，并在右侧选择“浏览”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSEwAQMm2oQ2kKOnJ5Neqwf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：弹出“打开”对话框，选中需要打开的演示文稿，然后单击“打开”按钮，即可打开选中的演示文稿。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngK6s4KiICqw86lPFX4Vtod"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"4、查看演示文稿","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCqWIiwSQWq6Qgt4USH2V4g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在 *** 完演示文稿后，为了确保内容的准确性，可以对演示文稿中的内容进行查看。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0gCCaUsYGkIKUHFN2443vf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（1）普通视图。在普通视图下，将光标移到编辑区上方，滑动鼠标滚轮可以对幻灯片的内容进行查看，或者将光标放在右侧的滑块上，拖动鼠标查看PPT中的内容。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGucuIIIsOqEaio5UoAWh1d"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1033,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/d78063363ba147b7a6e229de355892cc","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcn6umYe2e6Q6M6UOoHtgk7t1"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（2）幻灯片浏览。在状态栏中单击“幻灯片浏览”按钮，可在浏览模式中对演示文稿中所有幻灯片进行查看。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqWEU8YSyQkqg2z6nEEw5db"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1028,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/4ebe5332016a4be899aede1631437561","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnWgawy8CSek4KoNo5oeWUGf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（3）阅读视图。在状态栏中单击“阅读视图”按钮，即可进入放映预览状态，在这种状态下，用户可以对幻灯片中的内容和动画效果进行查看。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOAkg0o26u2aSum1hIfTLdf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1029,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/903f39220cb14887ad90e42b86b172d6","width":1916},"text":"","id":"doxcnekqeGAKgagSUmCVh4xCX7b"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2CM4qeKiyWIYodog1J4rKh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"前面介绍了演示文稿的基本操作，接下来学习一下幻灯片的基本操作，包括选择幻灯片、新建幻灯片、移动与***幻灯片、隐藏与删除幻灯片、更改幻灯片的背景等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0cwYEWKuwQkSkrgp5cHR4e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、选择幻灯片","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6WOusuiIk***8UpopxhtcXg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、选择单个幻灯片。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"如果想选择单个幻灯片，则只需在预览区域单击所需幻灯片，即可将其选中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnu0AWSAi8cCYOyOD3pjdW***"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1028,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/3d2d92c00d3a499fb89bac23a601afb8","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcngM***UkS0Mq4oCCvnVnJ48g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、选择不连续的幻灯片。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"按住Ctrl键不放，在预览区域中依次用鼠标单击多个幻灯片，即可将不连续的幻灯片选中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnie80Gqqiwgmsn47OMr7RzC"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1029,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/62d76f4c2eff439d9390436748f3e399","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnCsCoc62g6KcoOKY5amcEgg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、选择连续的幻灯片。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"按住Shift键，在预览区域中单击任意两个不相邻的幻灯片，即可将它们之间的所有幻灯片选中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOokKsomiIisUQpjiEbmjGf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1027,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/f24dd4a3dedb41ca9d1e89daf1189b10","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcn0UcIgMuoesIiohcCGRAZld"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"4、选择全部幻灯片。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"首先单击预览区域中任意幻灯片，然后按Ctrl+A组合键，即可将全部幻灯片选中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcng4usUGIs4e8kGVz4cXAE44"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1029,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/fdebe5fabd4340e697b6d4b2340803cf","width":1917},"text":"","id":"doxcn24sGWaMCeeasE3AmFwG30b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、新建幻灯片","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnScyM0UiqAAQU0O3FxjQyzm"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"若演示文稿中的幻灯片太少，不能满足编辑需求，则用户可以在演示文稿中新建幻灯片。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAeE0YuiQ6G***OieOUEbJlf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：打开演示文稿，选中任意一张幻灯片，在“开始”选项卡中单击“新建幻灯片”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“空白”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkW60C6maaMQcMHDZwiHdCh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：被选中的幻灯片下方随即新建一个“空白”版式的幻灯片。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkO2QCkEu2yqqsnmesdMnZd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：若在下拉列表中选择“两栏内容”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOgYOYecyYOKGM3819gv2Pf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：即可新建“两栏内容”版式的幻灯片。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmAcyCkW4sokSWGsj6M6J2f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"注：还可以通过右键菜单功能来新建幻灯片，即选择任意幻灯片，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“新建幻灯片”命令，即可新建—个幻灯片。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoGUUumWwuKakmO7oVYBwBe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、移动与***幻灯片","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuuA2k6oegg48Sc8X3XgGQf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在编辑演示文稿的过程中，如果觉得幻灯片的顺序不合理，可以移动幻灯片来调整其顺序。若需要添加相同格式的幻灯片，则可以***幻灯片，下面将介绍几种移动与***幻灯片的 *** 。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnq4OIC2KQG4eqiKAIb7Pwrc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、移动幻灯片。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"可以按照以下几种 *** 移动幻灯片：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0ECEKOwmS8isGS8ZNjvRvg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（1）功能区按钮移动","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOGsyyc0iaIwEPTQR4JZgnj"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择需要移动的幻灯片，在“开始”选项卡中单击“剪切”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGwa6UmCEuO2agBuOOtvGdd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1032,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/93b15e96b8604f119c6de17cbcd13778","width":1915},"text":"","id":"doxcnsiA0ms6SIwKiCciHXidcuh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：将光标定位至需要移动到的位置，单击“粘贴”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“使用目标主题”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6asUkwiKm2G0FQod5FXmNy"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1035,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/240be14ba3ca4305b150185c6f318f34","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnMeICsK4Akg6G2RQNywhvhc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：随即将所选幻灯片移动到目标位置。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2mce0CgSagoqCmZrqePTnb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1035,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/284471b8140c4c53b9e8456bef47c6bf","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnGO6gK4oeOkE0TfOBwTefmk"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（2）鼠标拖动移动","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoAuEYSqqoyOewZAT3FZpud"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择需要的幻灯片，然后按住鼠标左键不放，拖动鼠标至合适位置。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkyY8O0yAi6IgScCZ2qAGWg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1034,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/68d8e52e147a4be7b486422d1174d024","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcncUU6aESEUeomQRLdt0uU1f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：释放鼠标左键，即可完成幻灯片的移动。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQCmoW2wGYc2iMhpGtQJQrc"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1029,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/03ffe8adab6c4c8bb9a6028be8ea19ce","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnQe60yAeMeaQ2oHRbJZw5ih"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、***幻灯片","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcns6AgEeY4YK86CJQwfn2Y6L"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"若用户想要添加相同格式的幻灯片，则可以利用***功能来实现，下面介绍几种***幻灯片的 *** 。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0YCoW6EwY4WUMDFHfgLTCg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（1）功能区按钮***","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQkqqW82IUwGkYZVCUJNmAd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择需要***的幻灯片，在“开始”选项卡中单击“***”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWAEmOgqu2CqC0MAKClREqf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：在需要粘贴的位置插入光标，单击“粘贴”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“使用目标主题”选项即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnk4eSWMIe8IccumvoySFp6g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：此时在该位置可显示所***的幻灯片。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwcIC2sQso0W2AZpd2M7PSd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（2）右键快捷菜单***","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqugKeYUMiKkqAFznZMGo6e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"选择幻灯片后，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“***幻灯片”命令即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCGE8aQqGwKwuM1B2zSe9Fd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（3）鼠标+键盘***","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4gC2mu8IamOS8oWXy2vlRb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"选择需要***的幻灯片，并按住鼠标左键不放，接着在键盘上按住Ctrl键，然后拖动鼠标至合适位置，释放鼠标左键后松开Ctrl键，即可***选择的幻灯片。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnw2S8wSyyyKcSOkjYlOQjZb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"四、隐藏与显示幻灯片","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn28sAsOogQgCEY3bjjD1Ngh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果不想播放某张幻灯片，但又不想将其删除，则可以将该幻灯片隐藏起来。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcny0M8UE***SwmQwDmDL8Su3b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择需要隐藏的幻灯片，这里选择第2张幻灯片，切换至“幻灯片放映”选项卡，单击“隐藏幻灯片”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYE6Y6eQuCmSAc0txEHdNfb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1032,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/b5887c32ff3c47a19dc030503f44dd6a","width":1918},"text":"","id":"doxcnKyKOouiiueyiaGiKSIrSvg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：此时，可以看到所选幻灯片的左上角出现了隐藏符号。如果想要显示隐藏的幻灯片，则需要再次单击“隐藏幻灯片”按钮，即可将隐藏的幻灯片显示出来。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcns24SKIyYKa8QsxPMEEaD3c"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1034,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/38b1a6fc97794b3b8daf106485c7f26e","width":1915},"text":"","id":"doxcnskYEYomU6S08KgKbMhj8Df"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"注：还可以通过","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"右键菜单","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"来隐藏幻灯片，即选择需要隐藏的幻灯片，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“隐藏幻灯片”命令，即可将选择的幻灯片隐藏起来。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnowGsuYAaCEsQcypHlmsJdb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1031,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/07b219e1399e4b29ad6f7f195cc2ff2e","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnEgKqQMAkcSSU8UMyeoZIgc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"五、删除幻灯片","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnk8Q8cIWO8MOOS0lmuGFkVg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"当演示文稿中的幻灯片较多，有些内容多余，想精减时，可以将冗余的幻灯片删除。下面介绍两种删除幻灯片的 *** 。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWkW8IU0ECmiQGFL6lRrPcb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、右键菜单法。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"选择需要删除的幻灯片，然后单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“删除幻灯片”命令，即可将选择的幻灯片删除。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkMYuoQsUqweESgsv91rcbb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、快捷键法。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"选择需要删除的幻灯片，然后直接在键盘上按Delete键，即可将所选幻灯片删除。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUqkw42KwWcQga8i9ws0leh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"六、调整幻灯片大小","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWQ***MmoKsIy6oUrV0eJJxB"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"默认的幻灯片大小为宽屏（16：9），用户也可以根据需要自定义幻灯片的大小，下面介绍具体的操作 *** 。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqkuC2EokUgUKx0B *** yHpKn"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择幻灯片，切换至“设计”选项卡，单击“幻灯片大小”下拉按钮，从中选择“自定义幻灯片大小”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUWmYa8SYoCG6cDMmWAdgee"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1034,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/461e173393654537943153822ea607bd","width":1910},"text":"","id":"doxcn2ySAkqAQeooWqEnpNtyMZg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：打开“幻灯片大小”对话框，在“幻灯片大小”下拉列表中选择“自定义”选项，设置“宽度”和“高度”值，单击“确定”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIoeUUGo622uAoRQWdjeNTc"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1032,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/1e17e477db5442ab8d5dd32ca9d7dedb","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnqSk2MUmKmGqeW1Rd6cntht"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：弹出相应的对话框，从中选择“确保适合”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwUgaCiKkQK0iCgiH0R4AQd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1029,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/18a4ff2b874a4bc18efd1321fff10343","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnAIgO4cYEk8ia68rZX60mAf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：此时，可以看到幻灯片的尺寸随即被调整为自定义的大小。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnaaWiQk6EoU0GesWgiHLbwf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1032,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片的基本操作","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/3d0792bd10994c50a03cd2217eb75296","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnqOUGIY2ASSI6SsXeFZKyAb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"注：也可以直接在","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"“幻灯片大小”下拉列表","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"中选择“标准”选项，快速更改幻灯片的大小。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnaCm4GSSSSIGY4djRIXfbPg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"七、更改幻灯片的背景","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOiucoaEs2US4W8yxCk3Yjg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果对当前幻灯片的背景不满意，可以对其进行更改。具体操作 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKa8kEaeE62AKv3XrHwS7JO"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择幻灯片，在“设计”选项卡中单击“设置背景格式”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnO0acy2yOqIy2YTDGvJNd4j"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：弹出“设置背景格式”窗格，切换至“填充”选项卡，在“填充”组中选中“图片或纹理填充”单选按钮，接着单击下方的“文件”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYKMQW0***46WqyQrs *** Uc8b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：打开“插入图片”对话框，选择图片后单击“插入”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYW0iacAgOmSEKmzWmQsSFf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：关闭窗格，此时可以看到幻灯片的背景更改为图片背景的效果了。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSgUAoS2yyAqwC6mS11XrJe"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"版式设计","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkYMs8Q8AYmWyk9AJjLMkqf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"了解PPT的基本操作后，用户可以 *** 出简单的演示文稿，但如果想 *** 出精美大气的作品，则需要对版式进行一番设计。本节将对PPT的版式设计、模板的运用、PPT的配色等进行全面介绍。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEYWm42y28KAI2RYX3bcjKh"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnU4GKAA6 *** cSiI32lVVA9X2"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、什么样的页面版式才好看","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAAQEia2iuIcUqGElucio6g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"好看的页面版式会遵循亲近、对比、对齐和重复这4项原则。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUauOOgqG88sga8UGetd19c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、亲近","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8uKGMEyCkweO8y8xJXuKwb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"内容上有关联的要靠近，没有关联的要远离，同时要统一各段落的间隔。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8Y60GkyiKEGc4kBQUeya4b"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":729,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/0d007c6711a1422fac456534ee28a3c7","width":1298},"text":"","id":"doxcnKGOM *** Y8Gc4qWsdaFshyec"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、对齐","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSQMSOSS8q2u0KARm07dR2b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"各层之间要对齐，因为每一个元素都与页面上的某项内容存在某种视觉联系，如果随意安放，则会显得混乱。但页面中有很多个关键字时，打破对齐也能产生不一样的视觉效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6k4cqQ0QYwiIAZhqgaBOWf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":725,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/b62a12c1aee84354b32ddeb9d0ccaec4","width":1299},"text":"","id":"doxcnGy0qaYySg6s8OC21CMJKlg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、对比","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuMO0uk6eSY4yuC1KaSKfre"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"对比的 *** 有3种：文字对比、颜色对比和图形对比。通过对比可以迅速吸引观众的眼球。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcns4uCGaQAmqSYQlNf78nrwd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"下图则通过图形色块来区分各项内容。当观众看到这张幻灯片内容时，会立即被黄***块的内容吸引住。这里需要提醒一点的是，对比的力度一定要大，否则就不要用。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIqoGEiwAwYqYAFXnQnzGtd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":849,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/928b9521660f4bf3a468e6f00820e6ad","width":1519},"text":"","id":"doxcnUy20Wm4YKuIOacJOF52FSd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"4、重复","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOKowoIE0AUqsOkX9wFXcZf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"通过让PPT的部分元素，例如图片、字体、配色等重复使用，可以使PPT的版式风格统一，避免杂乱无章。但需要注意的是，不要一味地单调重复，要明确每个页面的作用。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGsocOCCaqAgYIvimCGcUTc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（1）标题页","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngwCwCuiSuKq6aEZsaEwx5f"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":727,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/826f716ecf8c484092e4a6600d785cb2","width":1269},"text":"","id":"doxcnmQukUYMkEWWGk7pmih7tsd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（2）目录页","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqYcAaS0gw06QojDZGJExUd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":726,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/1e7a21a45ec14570a48747043e497163","width":1263},"text":"","id":"doxcniEq6oe46meiWwxyGfudbqe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（3）内容页","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuGiy4WAe8umEEnpkEtpRaf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":723,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/459fef43472840a38da7b520bf80ed27","width":1282},"text":"","id":"doxcn0Cou8C0***Em6UXd7UTbuyg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（4）结尾页","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6SquoiqO62qQgTPchcYRfh"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":719,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/0a73176c94b440e2bebf59b6f1325899","width":1268},"text":"","id":"doxcngymkqqUa0wSo2JEnK9wO5g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、PPT中的留白艺术","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwcM22SgacOKk6AanoRhX7f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"留白留出的是空间。对于幻灯片而言，最直观的好处就是用户可以轻易地添加文字，保证文字信息不受干扰，和图片一起传递信息。另外，留白具有与生俱来的雅致、高端、文艺、轻盈、简约气质。下面就向读者介绍在PPT中人为留白的3种 *** 。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKyi6mMuCI4uAJty8TIb4xf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、寻找简单的背景图。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"尽量用简单的图片作为幻灯片背景，然后添加与主题相关的关键字即可。当然寻找的图片也应当与主题相关才行。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYOg62kw40iSsYvSraKl5hh"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":851,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/f0d55dd75dda46e19ea9208cf6e63460","width":1521},"text":"","id":"doxcnMq28yoSwwqeyKik0HR1S1b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、利用形状衬托关键字。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"利用精致的图片作为背景，使用矩形覆盖背景某区域，以作为文字的底衬，在矩形框中输入文字即可。该矩形框可填充颜色，也可提高它的透明度。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWiK4uYMcwo22IjUqt6Mn8d"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":770,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/a1e68423d53344fc9428e713e5b2c489","width":1368},"text":"","id":"doxcnEGKEWqoIGcwsAtHI6zUEAd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、减少页面信息量。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"留出空白其实就是做减法。减去多余的，留出关键的信息即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniY4W0CqAIYc0yM1aY9Ngkg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":861,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/50c7e8979e9849998010ae756441a08c","width":1524},"text":"","id":"doxcn6Is8WsgaoAcAes8Ux1iKXd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、页面排版的4大利器","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnA6YyoGGS88WiYddezhIPee"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"想要实现以上4项排版原则，则需要利用以下4种辅助工具来操作。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyOEMyiU86aWqqM9eXvkbQb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、对齐。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"PPT为用户提供了8种对齐方式。通过使用这些对齐方式，用户可以快速完成页面的布局，提高PPT排版效率，对齐的操作 *** 如下：：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUieC8GQ4Yukq2xM8re041f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择需对齐的元素，这里选择文本，切换至“绘图工具-格式”选项卡，单击“对齐”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“垂直居中”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncAA8ggsQsymke8f5hXaXae"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1032,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/752cc8aeb49f47e9991e4dd8f76381c8","width":1917},"text":"","id":"doxcnGsweeiw64WSW6xRmwH34me"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：此时可以看到，选中的文本已经显示为垂直居中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEsc0yAoQWWg4gJ2hI9CSYg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":767,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/0953f41b0fbd40ff92b7622c11a7759d","width":1375},"text":"","id":"doxcnw6K0oWWys86oOW2Uh6Spth"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：若在列表中选择“右对齐”选项，则选中的文本将向右对齐显示。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCocUMImgq4y0WI3r8Lcgkg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":771,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/40da651cdf3f4ffbb2a128f5d8adb3aa","width":1377},"text":"","id":"doxcnuUaAcqqQM8uEkDGwR31Syh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、组合。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"将多个对象组合在一起后，可以实现整体的快速移动，当缩小或放大形状组合时，组合中的所有形状的大小会同时发生改变，具体操作 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqeeoKeuuKmS2MXpgPJfeph"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选中图形对象，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“组合”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnomsWcMaIg2Ewiyd9nBSWgc"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1032,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/1a00f3c9258844528de89bb8ae20bf31","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnY2mYM***gII6YcfE3gdJtnc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：将形状组合在一起后，按住Shift键不放，可以等比例放大或缩小图形。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnsAww0sqssCag7mEpoXgglF"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、窗格。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"窗格可以通过单击“绘图工具-格式”选项卡中的“选择窗格”按钮打开，窗格的作用是调节各个元素的层次，对此也可以通过鼠标拖动来实现，还可以通过单击按钮实现。此外，通过窗格还可以隐藏元素，单击右侧的眼睛图标即可隐藏。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniKg20EwYMm6mqfmoiYpQTx"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1034,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/952de560a99540049c0eb648527d4142","width":1908},"text":"","id":"doxcnC84I88GqiA6Ie417K3v4ze"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"4、网格与参考线。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"网格和参考线一般用来定位PPT中的各元素。两者都是在编辑状态下显示，播放幻灯片时则会自动隐藏。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMgws2eq8ImIoIBX3fVDr3c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果需要调出网格或参考线的话，只需要在“视图”选项卡中勾选“网格”或“参考线”选项即可。这两个选项卡可以同时勾选，也可以只勾选其中一项。在对页面进行排版时，只需勾选“参考线”这一项即可。在勾选参考线后，系统会在页面中心位置分别显示水平和垂直两条参考线。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnaGQEKOoS2g88KPftXyvY8E"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1030,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/ab75655f089c4af1a45be7b09f7ef9f7","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnysUGYUaqYuoceEUcFg0QXc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"需要添加参考线的话，只需将光标放置在参考线上，当光标变成双向箭头时，点击鼠标右键，在弹出的快捷菜单中根据需要选择“添加垂直参考线”或“添加水平参考线”选项即可。也可以为参考线更换颜色。同样在参考线上点击鼠标右键，在快捷菜单中选择“颜色”选项，并在打开的级联菜单中选择一种颜色即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWgkew6sEYQKQM1tAQhAQXd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1033,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT版式设计原则","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/92343789a30d485c992960ef1eedcadf","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnWwI *** YMwoA8Gw1HQvt0MQg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果想要删除参考线，只需在“视图”选项卡中，取消勾选“参考线”选项即可。也可以在参考线上单击鼠标右键，在快捷菜单中选择“删除”选项，即可删除多余参考线。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMgyIoqeYce6qu8pizlTMLc"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"用好PPT模板","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUkSG8MI80EUAEFe8wsPDPg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果用户觉得自己 *** 模板比较耗时，则可套用网上下载的模板，或者对现有模板进行修改，符合要求后再使用。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcny0CEEuEYowEuopNOktemZb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、如何挑选模板","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncgWcAIam0wKgQvOS0pgO1f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"网上有大量的模板，其中不乏精品，但选择模板时，一定要挑选合适的模板。这里将介绍挑选模板的3个原则。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn28yk0AeqOUUYOW0jvlgRIh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、符合公司形象。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"如果用户展示的演示文稿代表整个公司，那么选择的模板一定要符合公司的形象。一般会选择严肃、大方的模板。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnI2Mqc2MgoCUMq4***0Ew1nd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、契合展示主题。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"选择模板时要符合展示的主题，不同的主题对模板的要求不一样。例如，如果主题是关于儿童教育的，就尽量用卡通类的，或者各种手绘风格的模板。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCEOQewmaowAOqE9xwNgCzg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、让人眼前一亮。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"用户 *** PPT除了辅助演讲外，最重要的是吸引观众的注意力，所以 *** 的PPT要有特色，看起来让人赏心悦目，这样才能让人眼前一亮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnm4mwKIyIgMSCkVHMdbM9uf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"注：可以通过PPT论坛、共享网站、PPT商店、PPT模板下载网站以及达人的博客或微博下载需要的PPT模板。需要提醒一点的是，下载模板时需弄清楚该模板是否可以商用。很多模板都存在版权问题，用户私下交流没有关系，一旦涉及商用，就需缴纳一定的版权费了。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmuIa42Gk64GGQRHvUS18zh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、对模板进行微调","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2g6wY8gmyCwWcrsUe7t0Mc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"一般情况下，模板下载完以后，都需要对其调整，毕竟没有百分之百合适的模板。当用户需要对模板进行调整时，可以分3步操作：删除、改变和添加。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8EmK8gEmOSE2Qtcki***Sdb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、删除多余页面或元素。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"删除模板中一些多余的页面，因为有些页面只是版面设计不同，而内容是相同的，像这些页面就需要删除。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAaGwwo0gM6ocvmtRBCg6Ns"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、改变。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"可以改变幻灯片的大小、背景图、配色、字体和版式设计等。首先，可以修改以下幻灯片的版式设计。其次，可以将标题幻灯片中的文字进行修改，例如修改其文字内容、字体或字号等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnq4K0ECyUgYgciGeHBNw2Rh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、添加。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"如果现有的版式不能完全满足需求，则可以另外添加一页版式。用户只需根据自己的需求简单调整即可。这样做出来的PPT既快又好。","id":""},{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"想高效 *** PPT，使用模板是更佳的选择。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncKsG4GoUo4cqmGZUql *** ee"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、认识幻灯片的母版","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAyOeGquuCukOa0NYd2QVLc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"使用母版更大的好处在于，它可以快速统一幻灯片的风格，例如文字、图片、背景等。下面将详细介绍母版的结构和类型。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmC4g2oGYUqiu89RtZeRCve"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：打开演示文稿，切换至“视图”选项卡，单击“幻灯片母版”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSwieEIwKoAiWueHiH0nA1g"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1030,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"用好PPT模板","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/b927342489f1412ab63b376404297355","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnwiuqUCQYMcSiUHBpyn4V4f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：进入母版视图后，在左侧可以看到一组默认的母版结构。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4Aq4uOY0U4cIw0VPZoSxJC"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1030,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"用好PPT模板","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/5637f1441c124d07b7efd41f331d9bd9","width":1915},"text":"","id":"doxcnSsiM8cacyMceERe1rWNHaf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：Office主题。该页位于母版视图的首位，也称之为母版页。在这一页中添加的内容会出现在以下所有版式页中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUIiE8CC0EekEeGnNRa2Xxb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"注：母版视图是由母版页和版式页这两个部分组成的。母版页仅为第1张幻灯片，除此之外，所有的幻灯片都称为版式页。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnySauWIQs8oUeAWEt7U7zkw"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1033,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"用好PPT模板","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/5917d33f95ac4d7288a019a744aa0249","width":1917},"text":"","id":"doxcniYaSYY6AQGwMkNVrw5K9je"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：标题幻灯片。可用于幻灯片的封面、封底设计。与母版页不同时，需要勾选隐藏背景图形复选框。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEAQCSkGAYAkOCwed5fD4Se"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1029,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"用好PPT模板","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/62ab88c0a72046a5ba83491af147cef2","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnOmyuguUSa6UOEVXU2v2wmc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤5：标题和内容。由标题框架和内容框架部分组成。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncKo6cueueGA24O75ftouuc"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1034,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"用好PPT模板","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/ffb800cbe4f640ff9aeec8300573ee9e","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcngWUIyqCEq0m8Xl5eeBGeA8"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤6：此外，还有节标题、两栏内容、比较、仅标题、空白、内容与标题版式等。这些版式都可以根据设计需要重新调整。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwc0OgMm2EWyOchcnkfEUrb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"四、修改幻灯片的母版","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2qIIEUqQisQgKcsdnwa9vg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"用户可以在幻灯片母版中修改字体和版式，使幻灯片形成统一的风格。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"具体操作步骤介绍如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoscgYY2QIC2MGgGQtQzobc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：打开演示文稿，切换至“视图”选项卡，单击“幻灯片母版”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnueAA6EWsQMGm0kslF477Dg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：进入母版视图模式，然后选择Office主题母版，并选中其中的标题占位符。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIiCoYEASg2K62Rqs3AFzDd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：切换至“开始”选项卡，单击“字体”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“汉仪行楷简”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmYEwmCqoyuoyGCB1Mq4iXb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：单击“字号”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“40”。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneyuI0eCYKsysZhXeiVpbLn"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤5：按照同样的 *** ，设置文本占位符中的字体、字号。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuaYWs4quqe0IScEUW4gWLd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤6：切换至“幻灯片母版”选项卡，单击“背景样式”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“设置背景格式”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoaaMM80KYKguye2QfHmbie"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤7：打开“设置背景格式”窗格，切换至“填充”选项卡，在“填充”组中选中“图片或纹理填充”单选按钮，并单击“文件”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKMsYgWg0W8uAuavhQ52Hof"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤8：打开“插入图片”对话框，从中选择背景图片后单击“插入”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6uWqUqK4w4wKTXOx6A3TFc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤9：关闭窗格，切换至“插入”选项卡，单击“图片”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8WQOSciykeA8MNoU0MkBLc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤10：打开“插入图片”对话框，选择图片后单击“插入”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMG4Eo6Yki8GW65CIHdIlgc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤11：将图片插入到母版中，调整图片的大小，将其移至页面合适位置。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKkUaSGOUsuYsiKwWHUdH7e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤12：按照同样的 *** ，插入另外—张图片，然后将其移至合适位置。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngAACmq4mKMUaw *** 425Rxzg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤13：选中标题幻灯片，在“背景”选项组中勾选“隐藏背景图形”复选框。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnayWIU62aYYqAoJG9FBwl4c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤14：隐藏图形后，为其填充背景图片。在“插入”选项卡中单击“图片”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6IQgwc0mMEauUPHKhhHSzf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤15：打开“插入图片”对话框，选择图片后单击“插入”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUuM84u6oYkGsKkSK5sfTdh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤16：插入图片后调整图片的大小，并将其移至页面合适位置。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnas0iK4SiW8o86PWZl5M6Tc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤17：单击“幻灯片母版”选项卡中的“关闭母版视图”按钮，查看设置的效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIkugGWSEGi0GSqzKsvpLog"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"用好的配色装扮PPT","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEqYo82kuq8mU2TJwc9aJYc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT中的颜色很重要，一个页面色彩靓丽且配色舒适的PPT很容易就能抓往观众的眼球。当然也不能胡乱的运用色彩，下面将介绍关于配色方面的知识，为设计PPT的版式打好基础。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8CqgCEoqiwCEuSvWiFd4xe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、几种安全配色模式","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEyWoWy4giGIWIZ9i1FAMEh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、灰底单色搭配。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"使用灰色作为背景色，和其他单一颜色进行搭配。灰色可以营造出精致、含蓄的氛围。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEU4QuA2kW6mkgDvP3Jk9Pc"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":770,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"用好的配色装扮PPT","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/e7a05de90f204736a30fc11e62f3d141","width":1372},"text":"","id":"doxcnGEqUcOueawIIq6ZTTlZHTh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、白底单色搭配。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"白色是百搭色，使用白色作为背景色，可以和任意颜色进行搭配。白色给人一种清爽、干净的感觉。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQ0qCcUuGuMcOecXyNDlLcc"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":723,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"用好的配色装扮PPT","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/7c2d026286b14348ab34511e8f38f97a","width":1288},"text":"","id":"doxcnUmKy4eagAm8eczT80P3FIc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、同色系明暗搭配。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"尝试使用同一种色相、不同明度的颜色进行搭配。这种 *** 比较简单和安全。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWwmisUU680wMUZOHBnDc0d"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":776,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"用好的配色装扮PPT","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/d0e97a314d1f4a49ab33847f883bcf16","width":1366},"text":"","id":"doxcnyEqIy4woas0qG6RcuARVGe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"4、只用单一背景色。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"有时使用单一的背景色加上几个关键字或图片，也能起到很好的效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnk4W4YYCeaW00UPx0ARv8Ed"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":777,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"用好的配色装扮PPT","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/1062b6368877461ab1d2673f5197bf68","width":1379},"text":"","id":"doxcnSQw4WU0iCysOyUBirnj1me"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、取色器的使用秘诀","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnsA62iawIe6IkEnXugdhx5e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"使用取色器可以将其他PPT中的配色提取并运用到自己的PPT中，也可以从图片中快速提取出需要的颜色。下面将为大家介绍具体的操作 *** ：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6u2CSEYWqkaYasxsTkGjLd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选中需要填充颜色的图形，切换至“绘图工具-格式”选项卡，单击“形状填充”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“取色器”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn64GUSAEwsSKO9KaYXeECG9"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1026,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"用好的配色装扮PPT","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/a99e7ed3816e41089f2a09216ad6d239","width":1919},"text":"","id":"doxcnkoW2Amw6eM4wc9iXrySUBf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：此时，鼠标光标变为吸管形状，将它移动到想要填充的色块上，在吸管右侧会显示该色块的色值。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcne2kS4WAgKoE4ALiY6lBqmf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：确认后单击鼠标左键，即可将选取的颜色快速填充到图形中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneUOkGemUgOwY2t4kg8QPZg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"注：","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"在电脑系统中，R、G、B分别代表着红色、绿色和蓝色，这3种颜色的值均用0-255的整数来表示。例如，纯红色的色值为（255，0，0），纯绿色的色值为（0.255，0），而纯蓝色的色值为（0.，0.255）。用户只要在“颜色”对话框的“颜色模式”选项组下设置这些色值参数即可，在默认情况下“颜色模式”为“RGB“。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqIk88ggSqm6iYVQ7eFXfZb"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"学会运用PPT主题","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncwwYSamaAKgqkF7NnmwYKh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"前面介绍了创建模板演示文稿，其实使用主题创建演示文稿也是一种不错的选择，这样可以免去用户自己设计主题的麻烦。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnccsuUw48CKoMeQTOll675b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、使用主题创建PPT","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqMWa8eCMAa647duzuSEYkn"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"使用主题创建演示文稿的 *** 和创建模板演示文稿相似，具体的操作步骤如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnioSKm4A0yUWu2jFuppUJvf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：启动PowerPoint，在打开界面的右侧单击“主题”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnim66UuAKYkCaklhW9Fb5hd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：在搜索到的主题中选择合适的选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnk2I4sIK4OKKQucg2CKgQLe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：单击该选项，将弹出一个窗格，然后直接单击“创建”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQy2icEKso6aaEjPAu5nN1f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：系统开始下载该主题演示文稿，下载完成后会自动打开演示文稿。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAgMscIOI026aIp3cxC0XOb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、修改主题样式","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcne2q6OkWYMOEOekoG9Ra1ae"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果对默认的主题样式不满意，可以对主题的颜色、字体、背景等进行修改，下面介绍具体的操作 *** ：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2E2EKQgk2qCmIBvfNcFmBc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：修改主题颜色。切换至“设计”选项卡，单击“变体”选项组中的“其他”按钮，从列表中选择“颜色”选项，并从其级联菜单中选择合适的颜色。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnamgOKmwEUCqi80MFxTVgCQ"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：修改主题字体。单击“变体”选项组中的“其他”按钮，从列表中选择“字体”选项，并从其级联菜单中选择合适的字体。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnk2G40gOiUo84cbk1IcCgme"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：修改主题背景样式。单击“变体”选项组中的“其他”按钮，从列表中选择“背景样式”选项，并从其级联菜单中选择“设置背景格式”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCeMwMMy***cq0oRXEfUgxBc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：修改主题背景样式。单击“变体”选项组中的“其他”按钮，从列表中选择“背景样式”选项，并从其级联菜单中选择“设置背景格式”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnosskEqusGAcQmKRhkriybe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤5：在“设置背景格式”窗格中单击“应用到全部”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnawIGmgiOiKe0odymBHMFFe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤6：单击“关闭”按钮，关闭窗格，查看修改主题背景样式的效果。（注：可以在“设计”选项卡中单击“主题”选项组中的“其他”按钮，从列表中可以直接更改当前演示文稿的主题。）","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUyIS4W24kukKsCAkC5aZ***"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"主题模板与模板的区别：主题模板可以统一更改颜色、背景，而模板则不可以。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUI20U6eEwaaMSshCvby9nc"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"字体搭配","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQ8aEEKwq0ke8nxqygk8dMQ"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":" *** 演示文稿的目的是为了展示内容，传达观点，所以文本是演示文稿中不可或缺的，并且在幻灯片中输入文本后还要对其进行各种设置。本节将对文字的选择、文本的输入、文本的编辑、文本段落的设置等操作进行全面介绍。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKm66KoeUuCesOwns35jv9f"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"文字的选择有讲究","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4WqIY88UOg2Ym2***TF8kWb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"字体是演示文稿中必不可少的一个元素，要想 *** 出优秀的演示文稿，选择一种合适的字体很重要。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCswUKSSKY8us6Te374ubFb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、选择合适的字体","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQIkmC0qwsAq6iiAMJFh1Ce"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"一般用户会使用PPT中默认的字体，这样 *** 出来的PPT看起来千篇一律。其实选择一种合适的字体，会起到不—样的效果，用户可以根据不同场合使用不同的字体。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneiGuIssQgwkqoz5HpbP2Vc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、普通字体。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"PPT中用到的绝大多数字体都可归为普通字体。例如，微软雅黑、黑体、华文行楷、汉仪系列等，目前大多数的PPT都经常使用这类字体。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4UmAuUWy8Qoq6zmChEZjKc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、钢笔字体。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"在PPT中使用钢笔字体，例如方正硬笔行书简体、方正硬笔楷书简体等，可以使PPT充满文艺感。这类字体比较适合教育、书籍、文化等领域相关主题内容。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSUoy8oe02UsqorpIkcLjnF"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、书法字体。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"书法字体很常见，例如日本青柳衡山毛笔字体、段宁毛笔行书、叶根友系列字体等，这类字体适合中国风、水墨风的PPT。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAkYaOos8mwkGyKQDQ1Vlob"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"4、卡通字体。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"卡通字体在视觉上非常可爱，例如华康娃娃体、方正卡通简体、方正胖头鱼简体、汉仪乐窑体等，这类字体适合儿童教学课件或与儿童相关的主题。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2EA0yCcaQMqUZ0hBYifBft"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"5、英文字体。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"前面几种类型均为中文字体，但在 *** PPT时还会用到英文，那英文字体该怎么选呢?这里将推荐几款常用英文字体，供用户参考。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOoKs66cQgOKqQD2aDaSYmp"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（1）TimesNewRoman。该字体是系统自带的英文字体，适合历史文化类PPT。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6EigwEkeQqUAeT3dgxA7ab"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（2）Tahoma。该字体也是系统自带的字体，给人一种亲切感，在一定程度上可以调节现场氛围。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncIEm0m0YK06IkxHYC5GoDg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（3）SegoeUILight。该字体比较纤细，使用该字体可以使整个PPT看起来清新自然。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyA0U6iQMAa2gYNov38uHmb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（4）PalaceScriptMT。该字体是装饰性很强的手写体，一般用于文艺、请帖、节日等主题。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnO6UOEkkw448GayQVPM1oCc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"提示：在一张幻灯片中，如果中英文同时存在，那么英文字体就要根据中文字体来调整，也就是说两种字体要相互匹配。另外，字体也有版权如果用户将下载的字体用于商业用途，则需要支付版权费。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnASAycsc84CKGawVe0dj26d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、安装字体的 *** ","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoAAyksCMyEmc8TJqFONruf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果用户在网上下载了几款字体，想要进行安装，可以按照以下几种 *** 进行操作：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8kA20cgIqku6AG5OcjWRZp"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、***和粘贴字体。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"可以全选需要安装的字体，然后按Ctrl+C组合键进行***操作，再按照相应的路径（C：iWindowsl）找到“Fonts”文件夹，打开该文件夹，按Ctrl+V组合键，将***的字体进行粘贴即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcny4YGYC2Am6uuYJiQxFhopc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、“安装”字体。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"首先选择需要安装的字体，然后单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“安装”命令即可安装。此外，还可以双击要安装的字体文件，在打开的字体对话框中单击“安装”按钮即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGcsGu4CaaAqC6yTwopmQcg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、使用快捷方式安装字体。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"在需要安装大批量的字体时，为了防止占用系统磁盘空间，影响软件的运行速度，可以使用快捷方式来安装字体，具体操作 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnU0OSc0GGymOGYRFrK6kgUd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：根据路径（C：iWindowslFonts）打开“Fonts”文件夹，单击左侧的“字体设置”选项按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniaGi4a0CyUcm21XACotUXf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：在打开的“字体设置”界面中，勾选“允许使用快捷方式安装字体（高级）”复选框，单击“确定”按钮，关闭该界面。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOccs26souQEqw5jy2lX3rf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：打开要安装的字体文件夹，全选字体，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“作为快捷方式安装”选项即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn86UC20Kqog6Gc3lA4XErYg"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"根据内容输入文本","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngaG0oKkcwqkY8N0OuaYbDf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":" *** 演示文稿时需要在其中输入文本，然后设置文本的字体、字号、字符间距、文本的特殊效果等操作。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcng2GUWQYUwsQMo5b2Yr7FRf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、输入文本。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"想要在幻灯片中输入文本，则需要占位符和文本框做载体。介绍两种常见的文本输入 *** ：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkSwCic0WuCGoW4iV0aphpe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、在占位符中输入文本。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片中的占位符由幻灯片的版式决定，用户可以直接在占位符中输入文本，具体的操作步骤如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwOUYkqCSwkAeCyb0ZWheTc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：打开演示文稿，将光标定位至需要输入文本的占位符中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYsWu0m0A0Y2yyk1h1TVCNe"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1030,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"根据内容输入文本","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/d9f94449a1844843977025a4c4eb71ce","width":1909},"text":"","id":"doxcn8ewMsKEuUqgQw9ZK7cNYne"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：选择合适的输入法，直接在占位符中输入文本即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnq8qIoEYQcGYQmmPTwdYsqh"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1032,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"根据内容输入文本","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/1ffe7b41f2214327bb61274b634ed241","width":1916},"text":"","id":"doxcny8sGUaO2K0k6q6XCszZ6zh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、在文本框中输入文本。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"需要在幻灯片中添加文本框，然后才能输入文本，具体操作 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUWuWGaoAi68AjUkZGQR1ko"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：切换至“插入”选项卡，在“文本”选项组中单击“文本框”下拉按钮，在展开的列表中选择“绘制横排文本框”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2SigUaOw60uS4cvq1KKY2b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：鼠标光标变为十字形状，按住鼠标左键不放，在页面合适位置拖动鼠标绘制文本框。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwyM0kC0qaGsYsDkTSjtA6d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：绘制好后松开鼠标，此时幻灯片中出现一个虚线框，即为文本框，并且光标自动定位至文本框中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSsGMMMq8I6umQ3ViXmbVFc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：在文本框中直接输入文字即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoi2SiS6ukwiMI9DTmAp6Me"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、调整字体字号","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcni2EsqqswgkW6oNp0Wnj5kc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在幻灯片中输入文本后，可以对文本的字体、字号进行设置，具体的操作 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnsi6qYWksYy4MwhEWbpOv4e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：调整字体。选择需要调整字体的文本框，然后在“开始”选项卡中单击“字体”下拉按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQwi82ke8oQCKykbDvdnLTg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：从展开的下拉列表中选择“汉仪行楷简”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnagWYeaciSsKiWgGwVLUOib"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：按照同样的 *** 设置其他文本的字体，查看设置的效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn08WMGWsgwcSQjsDomZ8Ocq"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：调整字号。选择需要调整字号的文本框，在“字号”文本框中输入“80”。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnq4MwomasKGOAg7moiDdi5d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤5：按Enter键确认输入。按照同样的 *** 设置其他文本的字号。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0UsSo0qWKC2gCwLCYLJdzb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"提示：","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"可以选择需要设置颜色的文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“字体颜色”下拉按钮，从列表中选择合适的颜色，即可为所选文本设置颜色。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWGEqsyoWUyG2cN3QuYI0ig"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、应用文本特殊效果","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqigeGKIWAwy0yo5***Wysvf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果用户想要文本特殊显示，可以为其设置加粗、倾斜、阴影、下划线等效果，下面将介绍具体的操作 *** ：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOKKwkeou4ws2egIDun7sZd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：加粗。选择需要加粗的文本，在“开台”选项卡中单击“加粗”按钮即可使文本加粗显示。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQyey8g02m64UgloNyK9ofh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：倾斜。选择文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“倾斜”按钮，即可将文本变倾斜。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUiUE86YY868yArCr7CJhNg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：阴影。选择文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“文字阴影”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYEAgOo0oCAU0wpWui8giSd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：下划线。选择文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“下划线”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngIAkIGEwYsY0GoJpIfzEhf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤5：如果用户想要清除设置的效果，则可以单击“清除所有格式”按钮，可以将所设置的格式效果清除。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn***ca8M24Ky2YqqOT7pturc"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"编辑输入的文本","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGo2AYc60myAs8mT6q9fxyc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在幻灯片中输入文本后，通常还需要对其进行各种编辑，这时就会涉及到对文本的一些基础操作，例如选取文本、移动与***文本、查找和替换等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0KICAeEUey88MPXXpXb *** c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、选取文本","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYsq4cMKQOgoOMd5Wwmglgu"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、选择连续的文本。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"只需要将光标定位至需要选择文本的开始位置，然后按住鼠标左键不放，拖动鼠标至需要选择文本的结束位置，释放鼠标左键即可。此外，用户也可以将光标定位至需要选择文本的开始位置，然后按住Shift键不放，单击选择文本的结束处，即可将开始到结束处的这段文本内容全部选中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8QI8sGieMEsU8ICubyk7wH"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、选择单个词语。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"需要将光标定位至某个词语的任意位置，然后双击鼠标，即可将该词语选中。还可以将光标定位至词语的开始位置，然后按住鼠标左键不放，拖动鼠标至词语的结束位置，释放鼠标左键，即可将该词语选中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGsiAAKKq8G6UuUyslQ9l9D"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、选择段落。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"在选择段落的任意位置处连续单击3次鼠标左键，即可将该段落选中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngQ4KK4G0Waomod6BzZlg4c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"4、选择多处不连续的区域。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"在文档中先使用拖动鼠标的 *** 选择一个文本，然后按住Ctrl键不放，依次选择其他文本，这样就可以将多个不连续的区域选中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcni6wWekq6WoGcURQEXgcY6g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"5、选择全部文本。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"使用快捷键全选文本，只需将光标定位至文本中任意位置，然后按Ctrl+A组合键，即可将文本全部选中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWuo0kSIGauyMKSIWS58IKc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、移动和***文本","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwKggqOOSsucEumtpibzV0e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"用户使用移动与***命令，可以减少重复文本的录入，提高工作效率。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCAE6uUC2CGy6WTeUiKvch2"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、移动文本。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"可以使用“剪切”命令移动文本，操作如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGqKqcAeWk26iue7ZQKGK8f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选中需要移动的文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“剪切”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGkeMWMWgKqOcqgvtQsupTh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：选择需要粘贴文本的幻灯片，然后在“开始”选项卡中单击“粘贴”按钮，文本随即被移动到该幻灯片中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0AiWCOYYAKGaCIaTHsTY3e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：选中文本，然后按住鼠标左键不放，拖动鼠标，即可将其移至幻灯片页面合适位置。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwwEqOIEUuICo8g8ho1BpPb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"提示：","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"使用快捷键Ctrl+X剪切文本，然后使用Ctrl+V粘贴文本，也可以移动文本。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn68eu0sUuEI4iIz8jjteRPd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、***文本。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"***文本是将所选内容***到剪贴板，然后粘贴到其他位置，具体操作 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0qGA0OeO2gemGmMukpcFSg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择需要***的文本，然后在“开始”选项卡中单击“***”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnieyEqGMqUKm2GukquZYVRh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：选择需要粘贴的幻灯片，单击“粘贴”按钮，即可***选择的文本。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncCSescackqowMlL5l5zXMb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"提示：","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"用户也可以选择需要***的文本，按Ctrl+D组合键进行***。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnS2O0MkOSSIgkIjGf6VTGEd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、查找与替换文本","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIkgecIuAqooOpjKrAyRdvl"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"当演示文稿中出现大量的错误文本时，为了节省时间，可以使用查找和替换功能进行更改，下面将介绍具体的操作 *** ：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAyEsQuc8yag4KU2CUC0qMd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、查找文本。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"首先要将错误的文本查找出来，具体操作 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmI4QUsWYao8gYVmig4ubdb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：打开演示文稿，在“开始”选项卡中单击“编辑”选项组的“查找”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqWYM0I82aGuKmcaDblOEGh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：打开“查找”对话框，在“查找内容”文本框中输入要查找的文本，这里输入“想要查找的文本内容”，然后单击“查找下一个”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEGcqos6KEKC0d0mWzzbnro"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：此时，查找到的文本处于选中状态，用户可以确认是否属于录入错误。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6gYc0wOiQSqCAiH4SQCsus"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：继续单击“查找下一个”按钮，当查找到最后一个文本时，会弹出提示对话框，提示用户已经查找到最后一个匹配项目，单击“确定”按钮，关闭“查找”对话框即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmCu6YUesCO8US2gLwF3DHh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、替换文本。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"用户可以逐一替换错误的文本，也可以全部替换，具体的操作 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwk02So4sGwcayAxAzs3SWd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：在“开始”选项卡中单击“编辑”选项组的“替换”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWMkGMm0oCYkiUrmlcqULib"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：打开“替换”对话框，在“查找内容”文本框中输入要查找的文本，然后在“替换为”文本框中输入要替换的文本，单击“查找下一个”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYg044k0oqqooeyXoATdP7D"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：系统随即查找到相匹配的文本，接着单击“替换”按钮，","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"即可将文本进行替换","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4gW4OY0gO8Aqm6SX5O5KCg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"如果单击“全部替换”按钮，可以一次性将查找到的文本全部替换。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKUIYmQemoSyYaCyMCcXDVe"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"设置文本段落","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcno6QWOYkkwCYIiWcqG08pCd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在幻灯片中输入文本内容后需要对其设置段落格式，这样整个页面才能更加美观，段落格式的设置包括设置段落对齐方式、行及段落间距等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQ48KoIog0GsG***fdW3ILcm"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、设置段落对齐方式","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnsKayCAS2GUY2qauQN8GJNh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"段落对齐方式是指段落对齐到文本框的方式，包括水平对齐和垂直对齐。下面将介绍如何设置段落的水平对齐方式。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4OEO88GosaaQ8jLpTrfXrf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选中需要设置对齐方式的文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“居中”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyCQAsc***eIaycHN415gegc"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1027,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"设置文本段落","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/2b06792aaf1a48d8a80ee23e45a3a841","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnE6Cs4ukcMquIa7cCMYS2IX"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：此外，用户还可以在“开始”选项卡中单击“对齐文本”下拉按钮，从列表中选择所需的垂直对齐方式。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnU2cA4y6Q8UKoMFChchT5xf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1033,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"设置文本段落","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/df26d627f069449d8f29c8f7b25a30f7","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnaG4igOyiYoqwvZTLVg3AKs"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、设置行间距及段落间距","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuOGyGAaek0GEcvcaFbWsXG"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果一个文本框中包含多个行和段落，为其置合适的行和段落间距，可以使整个幻灯片页看起来更加舒适、美观，下面将介绍如何设置子及段落间距。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGk6MGMQiE8okgDThUa9eDd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、设置行距。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"行距是指每一行文字之间的距离，设置行距的操作 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcno***qUc8ySycmkFt6E5iCzd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选中要设置行距的文本，在“开始”选页卡中单击“行距”下拉按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnaKwWW4SkQCUUSKTW6CJIZd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1027,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"设置文本段落","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/d128ee0373754169828e84983ec06843","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcn8kooSiU2wYI26mBgaRj5Vf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：对选中的文本各行之间的间距进行相应的调整。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmgSYoe2kKCAomweOhgy6og"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、设置段落间距。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"段落间距是指段落与段落之间的距离，可以设置段前和段后的距离，具体操作 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWWqoAyiWOiCkag1NbuicTg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择需要设置段落间距的文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“段落”选项组的对话框启动器按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn04K0S8SgwiewCCTm38h5Od"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1034,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"设置文本段落","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/f0b05192432c4935a002c469dac4c79f","width":1919},"text":"","id":"doxcnyQEuUa0i0GQsEnxRQoCcvd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：打开“段落”对话框，在“缩进和间距”选项卡中设置“段前”、“段后”间距，设置完成后单击“确定”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSQgSaaykIqQ6aOaGPMLmnf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1034,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"设置文本段落","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/d329213ad55a485796e2d497b99a0195","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnKmucGO2kWga2CgEqPf6bOe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、添加项目符号及编号","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIGC2Y4wMU8cyonnLppPobg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"为文本添加项目符号或编号可使文本内容更有条理性，下面讲解如何添加项目符号及编号。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOSYCQoqi84EiGMZOQe4vnh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：添加项目符号。选中需要添加项目符号的文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“项目符号”下拉按钮，从列表中选择合适的项目符号，这里选择“带填充效果的钻石形项目符号”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQ4SSgE0UiYEuWQrybrCFZf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1029,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"设置文本段落","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/0a51fb6e195a45a9b8c560361b73bb47","width":1915},"text":"","id":"doxcnScKCkiIWYaOIgJorkfOBHb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：可以看到选中的文本随即被添加了项目符号。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQIeuS8e8S8QckDyM6ul8Re"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":829,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"设置文本段落","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/7f92806c63ff418e8ab378b5a874543e","width":1475},"text":"","id":"doxcnQokkwoEQc8CAy0cTCZoVIg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"四、设置文本分栏","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2wU40W402W***AxvJAGtiXb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择需要分栏的文本，在“开始”选项卡中单击“添加或删除栏”下拉按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4EIkeQ00oU6WMXp2DWNMlg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1027,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"设置文本段落","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/599e44d7a19c4d6dbdc2ce739998d58a","width":1906},"text":"","id":"doxcnkykSCUaoAuY4IVbbGRgOMf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：从展开的列表中选择“更多栏”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnG2CqQqWaiuoamAwCDZzPBh"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1030,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"设置文本段落","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/8b3211911b1a4b19a8abecbc18a45036","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcny4QsG6i6MsUg8KoJtlKEGc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：打开“栏”对话框，在“数量”微调框中输入数值“3”，在“间距”微调框中输入数值“0.5”，设置完成后单击“确定”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnocgw6kEyQUwaOqwMbMDpbb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1033,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"设置文本段落","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/fb92f776e57f420baf500af2091005c2","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcn2uIiqUcge8aCwvZ3HGiBhh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：文本随即被分成3栏，并按照设置调整了各栏之间的间距。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSCSCeYSSA6ouq6lRIEOgPh"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1033,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"设置文本段落","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/cde8b5bf46c44859872f0a34ca45fb24","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnEWwgaUksak2OsRLE533Qqh"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"艺术字的妙用","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcno8coEAKGUYoUElMCdOLy6f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在 *** 幻灯片时使用艺术字可以快速抓住观众的眼球，而且外观多变的艺术字还能为幻灯片增加活泼生动的气息。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOaWCEsgCyqC8aLqXhQMHkb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"步骤1：","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"打开演示文稿，切换至“插入”选项卡，单击“文本”选项组中的","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"“艺术字”下拉按钮","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"，从列表中选择合适的艺术字效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWeiosogamqkgkl5XXgaA9g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"步骤2：","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"幻灯片中随即插入一个相应的艺术字文本框，接着在文本框中直接输入内容即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIwscMwiWUS0ey86RZ9OYPc"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"美化文本","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWKYGsGAaCAmK0eT6oJrfle"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"除了利用艺术字功能来美化文本外，还可以利用文本自带的美化功能，例如设置三维旋转文本、设置路径文本等， *** 出不一样的文字效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEKoqmG0OWwasQbmwuusysf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、设置三维旋转文本。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"在PPT中利用“三维旋转”功能可以","id":""},{"type":"text","text":" *** 透视字体效果","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"，具体操作 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0gWwsQ60iuSwsXW1QE8tWd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择幻灯片，切换至“插入”选项卡，击“文本”选项组的“文本框”下拉按钮，从表中选择“竖排文本框”选项。绘制一个竖排文本框，并在其中输入文本内容。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnaCWesUkiquSeauVOZgCayc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：选中文本。在“开始”选项卡中将“字体”设置为“方正隶书简体”，将“字号”设置为“96”，将“字体颜色”设置为“白色”。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2k2msyESekgqQt9W3lpU5e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：选中文本框，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“设置形状格式”命令。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4ASUwYa480268BWBbkUuae"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：打开“设置形状格式”窗格，切换至“效果”选项卡。在“三维旋转”选项组中设置“X旋转”“Y旋转”和“Z旋转”。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIks0qkCoKQO0ugkcSobBKg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤5：设置完成后关闭窗格。选中文本框，切换至“绘图工具-格式”选项卡，单击“艺术字样式”选项组的对话框启动器按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkMW88oMuiA8AK8h9p1CPid"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤6：打开“设置形状格式”窗格，切换至“文本填充与轮廓”选项卡，在“文本填充”选项组中调整“透明度”。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYII40uG2s2siGCZkkKqRlb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤7：调整好后关闭窗格，然后***该文本框，并修改文本框的文字内容，同时调整该文本的字号。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEY6ie0IWgOymOO***ILIJXb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤8：选中***的文本框，打开“设置形状格式”窗格。在“效果”选项卡中设置“三维旋转”的“X旋转”“Y旋转”和“Z旋转”。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnac224Ki02YEO0YBxNV0cZb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤9：设置完成后关闭窗格，查看 *** 透视字体的效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMQyc2Yec2QuqGoDN5KlJwg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"提示：由于透视角度的不同，所以文字位置一旦变化．就需要重新调整参数。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuY0OOsGoeUA82h24qlVjyg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、设置路径文本","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYwA2MqGeQS0Y8ZWCMjJK7d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"用户可以通过“文字效果”功能来 *** 拱形字体，具体操作 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcns6ksW2cGcIEcMZ6nifzuJe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：绘制横排文本框并输入文本。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGAGc4AOi6emKATYLr3yvve"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：选择文本，在“开始”选项卡中将“字体”设置为“汉仪橄榄体简”，将“字号”设置为“44”，将“字体颜色”设置为“深绿色”。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0IcCw84ykQOeYj4mCt6Lug"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：切换至“绘图工具-格式”选项卡，单击“文字效果”下拉按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnaww4OMcOck6yCyKUu6ezMb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：从展开的列表中选择“转换”选项，并从其级联菜单中选择“拱形”效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkuWmeew8wI0msrQh0ngSog"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤5：文字已变形。为了能够与图中地球轮廓相一致，则需对它进行调整。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSq2yikwMAuo68Rguq31Xzf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤6：选中文字，将其移至合适的位置后，将光标放在文本框下方的中点上，此时光标变为双向箭头。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn02oSoY4kOcQoWegH1Tnr4B"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤7：按住鼠标左键不放，向下拖动鼠标至合适位置，调整文字的弯曲度。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnskOi6EuwuWqsudVi4TmhXl"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤8：调整文字的方向，将光标移动至文字起始处的路径圆点（橙色的圆点）位置，按住鼠标左键不放，拖动该控制点至合适位置，可调整文字路径。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnK4Cg46OKM4eaeIGQtxVvPd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤9：对路径进行反复调整后，查看效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnK0EWKwiY2sqWqKi89YO63b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤10：改变“心”和“家”文字的“字号”和“颜色”。查看 *** 拱形文字的效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKS8KWwY8IYI6mISj9W79bf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"提示：将路径圆点向下拖动时，文字会随着路径适当放大；相反，将路径圆点向上拖动时，文字会随之缩小。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8KAackM62y6sGQZ3zCzVZf"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"图片 *** 攻略","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnA6AE6kkYqCGsqYFJM6eRBg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT中如果只有文字，则会显得枯燥乏味。而使用图文结合的模式更能吸引观众的注意力，所以图片在幻灯片中起着重要的作用。选择一张好的图片，会使PPT更加出彩。本章将对图片的选择、插入和编辑操作进行全面介绍。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMeeIYuOgWqewiGeuThhVGd"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"图片选择 *** ","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMSIMIScyq44ekBb7oPrr4f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在 *** 幻灯片时，用户通常不清楚使用什么样的图片比较合适，其实图片的选择也有技巧。选择合适的图片不仅能在内容上契合主题，也会使页面更美观。下面就介绍在选择图片时需要注意的几点问题：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnicIiE4MeIew06pVGoxFmme"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、选择高清的图片","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWI66K0wmSkWEW2JMrAOp8g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"高清的图片能给人视觉上的享受，如果图片模糊不清，不仅看起来很粗糙，而且容易使观众产生视觉疲劳。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWOMk4cOQAoG2YrGyNYjEGh"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":601,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"图片选择 *** ","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/5c57c2959e6c4d64a6f9d33e1e35caf1","width":975},"text":"","id":"doxcnA2wKweqA0EUQ0UzFlCXWtc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、选择与内容相关的图片","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnaOwGwK6wk0ci0QieI0qfFg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在 *** PPT时，要选择和幻灯片中内容相关的图片，或与主题相关的图片，这样便于观众的理解。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWQ4AeKwwEiqAeWd04tAOpg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":608,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"图片选择 *** ","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/33c43d71bb6a4d10b6a1ab729f6fa586","width":1028},"text":"","id":"doxcnQgIUCymo82mGeiF4MOeIjf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、选择与PPT风格相关的图片","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnI4MiiaagwiWQURQmH6YJOh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"除了注意以上两点以外，用户还要注意选择的图片是否符合当前PPT的风格。PPT可分为以下4种风格。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnE2gIgKmAKigmIdZJtc1YLh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"1、严肃沉稳。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"此类风格的PPT，大多以写实图片为主，并且细节丰富，光影变化细腻，给人一种沉稳、可信感。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneEyC4iKoIiqgyAXTC *** Ewg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":604,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"图片选择 *** ","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/cb5f252253aa4373a7401a1fa9cdc4b6","width":806},"text":"","id":"doxcnWU6WMMiASq8IQP0loMYyGc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"2、轻松幽默。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"此类风格的PPT，主要以搞怪的表情或动作图片为主，这样可以增加幻灯片的趣味性。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqkkWGUswU4cycNiDbkOEb6"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":611,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"图片选择 *** ","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/e6130d879a264dc38d3a01e220f5fe06","width":1056},"text":"","id":"doxcnKkK6Io6cOCaITyzudml6ph"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"3、诗情画意。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"此类型的PPT没有明确的主题，主要以浪漫、清新或怀旧类图片为主，以渲染主题气氛。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnakEWQwKyqKOs4k18fIa9Kd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":680,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"图片选择 *** ","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/71920c51192647d7923ee3ad089568c8","width":1119},"text":"","id":"doxcnoiMe0W8UGqSWKUotBeeG8d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"4、另类独特。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"此类PPT一般都以创意性很强的图片或者以绘制的图案为主，也可以两者结合，给人","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"独树一帜","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"的感觉。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4q2GAUm8e40McxXV1cI2Lh"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":714,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"图片选择 *** ","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/e97a93acbd4a44eea96f4e7f4ec2a35e","width":962},"text":"","id":"doxcnUAIgySY8eyuQEFptj5wALb"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"好图片的搜索 *** ","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAuc0iekWCkWO2B0NGmxqde"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"有人说使用“百度”搜索到的图片其质量参差不齐，不好挑选。其实不然，有这种想法的人是因为他们没有找对 *** 。下面就向用户推荐几种搜索图片的 *** 。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcng***eAymS8iiUQlndQr2Ouf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、提炼搜索关键字。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"输入关键字即可。例如搜索“时间飞逝”类的图片，输入“时间”关键字。而如果输入“时间匆匆”关键字后，搜索的结果就大相径庭。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwU4M88MWcG2Mm4zMC1osZg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、组合词搜索法。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"有时候单凭一个关键词搜索出来的图片范围太广，想要从中找到符合的图片很费劲，这时可以试着将几个关键词组合在一起进行搜索，限制搜索条件，这样搜索出来的图片会更精准一些。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWaaouyYoIwYs4Lud0IScmf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、联想词搜索法。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"有时使用关键词和组合词都搜索不出满意的图片，尤其是搜索一些偏理念或概念化的内容，很难找到对应的图片，这时可以尝试联想词搜索。将抽象的概念具体化，这需要用户发散思维来联想。例如，想要寻找关于“探索”的图片，则可以用“宇宙”关键字进行搜索。用户也可以搜索“望远”，对远方的未知，也能激发人们去探索。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoASKi4iooAgEMfDWcUzA7b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"提示：图片也有版权，如果将图片用于商业用途，则需要支付版权费，使用时需要谨慎。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmKo0GiK***OKaGOUfsEjeoc"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"在文中插入图片","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngCiEI6e0eekUyIJx9ADxsc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、插入本机图片","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0qKiAqcmioaMAJtKFK7rOd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在 *** 幻灯片前，通常会先搜集相关图片，将满意的图片保存在电脑中，然后在 *** 时将这些图片插入到幻灯片中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniCUG4QSikYUk2rrde5mUTh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：打开演示文稿，切换至“插入”选项卡，单击“图像”选项组中的“图片”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngOQsEW0uWieyuM7jIr8dsC"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1031,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"在文中插入图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/db917861e6d0458aa14edc4c0e16d3da","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnaWY8GAEouUiw2fGagdER3b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：打开“插入图片”对话框，在“桌面”找到保存的图片，然后单击“插入”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSU4IAsW4A6KGSC3YHoo87f"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1027,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"在文中插入图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/99a021b97be34c82b1732309f0f85baf","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcn0akQY02u6GIkuwUFA1cuEd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：选中的图片随即***入到幻灯片中。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoyS8s82kYi8ec6hjAwKFWb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1039,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"在文中插入图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/6644c5587af8465f80cd0d3a0b7e3fc5","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnmmO0WkOu8oGYAnCYccRt8g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：将光标移至图片右下角的控制点上，按住鼠标左键不放，拖动鼠标调整图片的大小。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUyeaGUwU0K2YcEJJY3mtlB"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1033,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"在文中插入图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/2878146ab0cf4781b4939fe170892daf","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnEywkI8M22SiKi0UZPKkYee"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤5：将光标置于图片上方，按住鼠标左键不放，拖动鼠标将其移至页面合适位置。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkgIamiSSOyeMwBe0KXhP8g"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1027,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"在文中插入图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/d7f0afd917bd4c8094c894dcc63cf52c","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnmk4KW2kuaoOiYNoV8DI4Hb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、插入屏幕截图","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKIq4cWgcU0G68TfFqqsQqb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"用户可以使用屏幕截图功能，将在桌面上打开的网页或其他内容捕捉下来的图片插入到幻灯片中，下面介绍具体的操作 *** 。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqaAUkUM8Mc4mu0pYXjYsrd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择幻灯片，在“插入”选项卡中单击“图像”选项组中的“屏幕截图”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“屏幕剪辑”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn***MSY2QmKMWyuiqnbNwpE4"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1031,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"在文中插入图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/1fa6fedfed3f4ffe8d643252ee88c289","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnI8K8K6IEo2eCwXRmJpLc6d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：屏幕随即变为模糊状态，按住鼠标左键不放，在打开的网页上拖动鼠标，截取所需的部分图像，此时被选取的区域会变得清晰。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqaeYmUEeYYA68AjoK8TXmc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：选取完成后松开鼠标，此时选取的部分图像就***入到了幻灯片中，最后调整图片的大小和位置即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnW2uWoc2Auk6UewI7Lr1Z2d"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"修饰图片","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKWc2Qk6wgyGuSfIUpbSSAG"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在图片插入到幻灯片后，用户还可以对其进行各种设置，例如更改图片的颜色、样式、外观，或裁剪图片等，使图片更加契合幻灯片页面。下面将分别对其进行详细介绍。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncUm4g8wo4wgKO8UdiwppYf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、更改图片的颜色","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2eCEsgCkGQcEohcP3Gquhd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果用户对图片的颜色不满意，可以对其进行更改。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4mUMsCYq8eq4E9r54e1Wch"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择图片，切换至“图片工具-格式”选项卡，单击“颜色”下拉按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQG2kUWwSia2ash9xcVOOk1"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1030,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"修饰图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/93e0579d4afa4c95942e8f60f97b6400","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcneAKMUOcmKwSkEyMOA***Zhb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：在展开列表的“色调”区域，选择“色温：8800K”选项，可以看到选中的图片已经被修改为相应的颜色。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneAG4yCOcSKc08L54Q7iwQd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1034,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"修饰图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/e50b93cacef348e2abc36f46e72cb882","width":1919},"text":"","id":"doxcnYUWOCiwGmu6SSy3OIFyqye"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、更改图片的亮度/对比度","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnW48qE2yU84CmCIGQETeKzb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"用户可以根据需要调整图片的亮度与对比度。下面以将图片更改为“亮度：+40%对比度：-40%”为例，介绍具体的操作 *** 。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAuyQkcGaAKg6E9DNujKPle"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选中图片，在“图片工具-格式”选项卡中单击“校正”下拉按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniA62cQcIkuaS0y3OZOwXTg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1030,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"修饰图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/0d17e05684ba4c94a85c8571a49dffd7","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnEMIgo4SeOcE4CY0XedriMe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：从展开的列表中选择“亮度：+40%对比度：-40%”选项，选中图片的亮度和对比度随即进行相应的调整。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkGIuAweiocemiCm6nOTVWf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1037,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"修饰图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/d10579fca0ca41acacc1f0b9c10a51c2","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnQGC6s46mqQwYGEjq7qwkqe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、设置图片的艺术效果","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnC6UYoISaqoUA0KJPApXFKd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"用户可以为图片添加艺术效果，使图片更具有艺术气息。下面以为图片添加“纹理化”艺术效果为例，介绍具体的操作 *** 。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEiu4Yk48eQqmGS6 *** Cngxg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选中图片，在“图片工具-格式”选项卡中单击“艺术效果”下拉按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwOaeAec80aEKE36hlSKWKd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1030,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"修饰图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/b9232fc9817844f0b71eff9445e023bf","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnSqmA4uC28cWOesLQ9hKXFb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：从展开的列表中选择“蜡笔平滑”选项，选中的图片随即应用了该艺术效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnA8Iq0soSWYYqKYwYUzBCQc"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1031,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"修饰图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/24c27ab4651648a8a0898c245343413d","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnmWWMaiIEMyueOYRu3Unsif"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"提示：","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"用户可以在“艺术效果”下拉列表中选择“艺术效果选项”选项，打开“设置图片格式”窗格，在“艺术效果”选项组中可以设置“透明度”和“缩放”选项来调整运用的艺术效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIkMoEsWSc6oO6cAcewfKTf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"四、设置图片样式","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6Y4sIWeQMY666RCLRNOI2b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT内置了很多图片样式，用户可以根据需要设置相应的图片样式。下面以将图片的样式设置为“简单框架，白色”为例，介绍具体的操作 *** 。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcny8gMWKk0iuCcyyqJPe2XNg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择图片，在“图片工具-格式”选项卡中单击“快速样式”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnw8kCC4G8KccauO3am5Xvnb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1028,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"修饰图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/57c55f1a06794509b89e42408e8d5713","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnaiOowmu4wQkqUJoStrUmLg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：从展开的列表中选择“简单框架，白色”选项，选中的图片随即应用该样式。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnE4iwok2cSa0Yk3bVfshgVb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1029,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"修饰图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/1a708b8e2c674cbf88b394ba63ba6d15","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcn4gS2Ko8gmoWgKC6QoIh23b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"五、对图片进行裁剪","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnimgUm8MWYe04F5Un4mbvFA"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"当幻灯片中的图片尺寸过大时，为了不影响整体美观，用户可以对其进行裁剪。下面以将图片裁剪成“心形”为例，向用户介绍图片的裁剪操作。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkSOKsC6MEaaGqOcFUPAMVd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选中需要裁剪的图片，在“图片工具-格式”选项卡中单击“裁剪”下拉按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0OK8q24g0cEmCM0ktKnA4g"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1031,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"修饰图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/010ebda590aa4d4b924e15be59440c81","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnqE0ooSSWYckKEhELLze0ig"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：从展开的列表中选择“裁剪为形状”选项，并从其级联菜单中选择合适的形状，这里选择“心形”选项。选中的图片随即被裁剪成心形。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6IW64k2MOWSYaye6LbErzf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1036,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"修饰图片","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/dcbaabd37c40485dbfaa59f073d74bbe","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnSscKMaqmuws0E09ibtnR5X"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"六、删除图片背景","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWUOskAQmYSGO7xkQzx5EF1"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT还具有一些简单的图片处理功能，例如“抠图”功能，即将图片的背景删除，下面介绍具体的操作 *** 。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnS2SGQIy86oc6SIE4AALkef"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选中图片，切换至“图片工具-格式”选项卡，在“调整”选项组中单击“删除背景”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8OIwA4ueGKyAfaUIQFocKl"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：功能区左侧新增一个“背景消除”选项卡，图片周围出现8个控制点，并且背景变为紫色。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWmSgMK4gicaEkj4tNE5Zjb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：将光标移到下方中间的控制点上，按住鼠标左键向下拖动鼠标，调整保留的区域。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnw2soY2m040sYs1Sz5DKZAg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：若调整控制点后仍有一部分不在保留区域，则可以单击“标记要保留的区域”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEAIwCSQUW0S86XehRWB6Nc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤5：鼠标光标变为笔样式，然后单击鼠标标记要保留的区域。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSU6o6gmaE8IAGA1Cd *** 1Jd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤6：标记完成后，单击“保留更改”按钮。可以看到图片的背景已经被删除，只保留了主体部分。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIMaCieuGm0wwYHSfXRmKod"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"提示：","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"若用户需要删除多余的标记，则可以单击“删除标记”按钮，此时该按钮处于选中状态，然后在多余的标记上单击鼠标左键，即可将其删除，删除完成后再次单击“删除标记”按钮退出即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngQcsEQSe6GIK4Utfh5***ve"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"表格与图表","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnC0YkO8GI4gkgUn5xKZmi2f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"用户在 *** 分析类演示文稿时，可以使用表格来对数据进行分析和管理，在幻灯片中插入表格的 *** 有多种，如插入固定行和列的表格、插入指定表格、插入Excel表格等，本节将对其进行详细介绍。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGOo4GUokme4o4fQ5Z9byeh"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"在PPT中插入表格","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnquWGQ8cca68IsVX5e2Ntid"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、插入固定行数、列数的表格","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmsGeoQyEUEuuOQUMZA2pLc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在“表格”列表中滑动鼠标，可以直接插入表格，但最多只能创建8行10列之内的表格。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0KwkywCqEQimY4SWvEoXeI"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择幻灯片，切换至“插入”选项卡，单击“表格”下拉按钮，在展开的列表中滑动鼠标，选取8行10列的表格。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnC8aAsEoAQmUqa2Zj9hmuK4"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1031,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"在PPT中插入表格","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/1266da7c603446008332ca69b5dc9e26","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnQMOQK2e4kKq4kBr1brKP3d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：选取完成后单击鼠标，即可插入。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0UIksWIWq4S8OwbSgtnhud"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":1027,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"在PPT中插入表格","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/eb60b62ccb2a4df88dd029e84f367cbf","width":1920},"text":"","id":"doxcnUUaW4YY6OoSCczegOn6Q***"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：调整表格的大小和位置，然后在其中输入数据即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYQ2Wec8g8CqYWHZeG1aBJf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、插入指定的表格","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYYIQok6w8SeycTaNWr0SPd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果之一种 *** 满足不了需求，还可以通过对话框插入表格，具体操作 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn288qE2U6 *** Mg6q1kqoRqNf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选择幻灯片，切换至“插入”选项卡，单击“表格”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“插入表格”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMkQeq4kYEEmKG6dnQDUU9e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：打开“插入表格”对话框，输入“列数”和“行数”数值，单击“确定”按钮。幻灯片中随即插入一个5列10行的表格。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUMkO2kiEaSWCU8AyqVntpO"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：调整表格的大小和位置，输入数据内容即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKiKMSw266sSicxjXTKa0Kg"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"对表格进行编辑","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniUo0MCecWq8a6bQmw5KC2N"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在插入表格后，用户可以根据需要对表格进行编辑，例如设置文本对齐方式、调整行高和列宽、拆分或合并单元格等，下面将分别对其进行详细介绍。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8koiMSG2MkyawDnQAxXs9f"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、设置文本对齐方式","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAukeeCyKaOuEicly67DxNh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选中表格，切换至“表格工具-布局”选项卡，在“对齐方式”选项组中单击“居中”按钮。可以看到表格中的文本内容已经水平居中显示。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0sOo0WSYMQ2seEwFYlNz3b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：在“对齐方式”选项组中单击“垂直居中”按钮。可以看到表格中的文本内容已经垂直居中显示。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4eaSkEqWgYmwI1Xirno37b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"提示：","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"用户也可以在“开始”选项卡中单击“段落”选项组中的“居中”按钮，将文本设置为水平居中。单击“对齐文本”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“中部对齐”选项，可以将文本设置为垂直居中显示。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngoqiQMM84QIkqqFhbdR8Pb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、调整行高和列宽","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngiySAA0cy0UaSazE4jIFNd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在表格中输入数据后，因为数据类型的差异，所以需要调整某行或某列的高度和宽度，使表格看起来更美观、协调。下面将介绍表格行高和列宽的调整操作：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYO4ykSiqEquQovDiA2CRZd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：调整列宽。将光标移至需要调整列宽的列右侧边线上，光标变为双箭头形状。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGU8***yWMsiyc2VgoUyCI4b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：按住鼠标左键不放，拖动鼠标，光标下方出现一条虚线。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAGYeIuIeWi86ioag0U8W6b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：拖动鼠标将虚线移到合适位置后松开，可以调整列宽。按照同样的 *** ，调整其他列的宽度。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkGwSCe2GgYqwI37VisNsRc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、拆分或合并单元格","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnsGOUGQU *** QoEOQ1HL8qo0g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"为了使表格中的数据能够合理分布，用户需要对单元格进行合并或拆分，下面介绍具体的操作 *** ：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncy48mCOm86coETDmJLRXJd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：合并单元格。选中需要合并的单元格区域，切换至“表格工具-布局”选项卡，单击“合并单元格”按钮。选中的单元格区域随即被合并成一个单元格。按照同样的 *** ，合并其他单元格区域。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCiogyO6yuCo4MXhAJJgYFd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：拆分单元格。选中需要拆分的单元格，在“布局”选项卡中单击“拆分单元格”按钮。打开“拆分单元格”对话框，在“列数”和“行数”微调框中输入数值，单击“确定”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuAkc6mEkea6kYJLOUEoIIh"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"对表格进行美化","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnK60ig6Uu0uiQItdCDWaymf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在幻灯片中创建的表格是自带表格样式的。如果想要更改表格样式，使其看起来更加美观，则可以使用内置样式美化表格，或自定义表格样式。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmcKSu4MQ8wSI4cJMuZnXAb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、使用表格内置样式","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQaAsGs4GGMEcQB994bcVxb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选中表格，切换至“表格工具-设计”选项卡，单击“表格样式”选项组中的“其他”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYiAemMOiQoGuE0txY9M6MS"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：从展开的列表中选择合适的表格样式，可以选择“中度样式3-强调6”选项，可以看到表格应用了所选的样式。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnq6I *** K4Si2UgK8vm88KNif"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"提示：","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"如果用户想要清除应用的表格样式，则可以在“表格样式”下拉列表中选择“清除表格”选项即可。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcncwYksimY8GaKgttNW7K4Kc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、自定义表格样式","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuaOKUMyE408iEJwODKCf7g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果内置的表格样式无法满足需求，则可以自定义表格样式。例如，设置表格的边框、底纹等，下面对其进行详细介绍。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0SysQEymGAIke0xmFXNbTd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：选中表格，在“表格工具-设计”选项卡中单击“绘制边框”选项组中的“笔划粗细”下拉按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniGKK2KugQciWkHgl5qx7Qc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：从展开的列表中选择“3.0磅”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSCMYMu2EKQ04fc3ai1xADp"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：在“绘制边框”选项组中单击“笔颜色”下拉按钮，从列表中选择合适的颜色。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmqOk08k2GAC4AZ5HNX0SNd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"提示：","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"在幻灯片中，用户还可以使用图表来展示数据，它使复杂的数据关系变得可视化、形象化，并且增强了幻灯片的感染力。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcny2iGEaqgemUey2pxnmfAOh"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"图表另类画法","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnymaWu2uQqMKYuIECDyYIgc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"如果用户觉得创建的图表千篇一律，不能引起观众的兴趣，则可以在基础图表上增加一点创意，这样图表就能变得妙趣横生，让人眼前一亮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnw2Mk8kg2CkEyMfhjkgwwyg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"用户可以使用图片填充功能， *** 出创意条形图，下面介绍具体的操作步骤：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGWKAqQiwg2CmMXh67SlJIh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤1：在“插入”选项卡中单击“图表”按钮，打开“插入图表”对话框，选择“条形图”选项，并在右侧选择“簇状条形图”类型，单击“确定”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnicgIk44qaE6yQ5tzXgjBnc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤2：在打开的Excel电子表格中输入相关数据，单击“关闭”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKWoQ6suG6MYiQzK8mQSvew"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤3：幻灯片中随即创建一个簇状条形图。选中条形图，在“设计”选项卡中单击“添加图表元素”下拉按钮，从列表中选择“坐标轴→主要横坐标轴”选项，隐藏横坐标轴。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0Q4cae4ikuSis7N7WhBFcg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤4：在“添加图表元素”下拉列表中选择“网格线→主轴主要垂直网格线”选项，隐藏图表的网格线。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnso2KmYaiEUeYmmJCGd08Df"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤5：选中垂直坐标轴，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“设置坐标轴格式”命令。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOwmuoo2640ssOSeb3nMe5d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤6：弹出“设置坐标轴格式”窗格，切换至“坐标轴选项”选项卡，在“刻度线”选项组中单击“主刻度线类型”右侧的下拉按钮，从列表中选择“无”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4e4GiCegCKI646a3lYBcxc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤7：关闭窗格，查看设置的效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkqusqMsQcucYOUPBoEcd2e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤8：选中“步行”系列数据点，单击鼠标右键，从弹出的快捷菜单中选择“设置数据点格式”命令。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkC0UOUWcCQaocZjTxvURhc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤9：打开“设置数据点格式”窗格，切换至“填充与线条”选项卡，在“填充”组中选中“图片或纹理填充”单选按钮，然后单击下方的“文件”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYC0M86iKGOcCSscAbG211c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤10：打开“插入图片”对话框，选择合适的图片，然后单击“插入”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcns0eWIaMGSG2cUpc3oPtbPd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤11：此时，可以看到图片被填充到被选中的柱形中，但该图片已严重变形。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnY6i0guM6y4Swq44CzkEUXg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤12：再次打开“设置数据点格式”窗格，在“填充”选项组中选中“层叠”单选按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyg2yUIQMekkQg9ZmyWCOwe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤13：此时，可以看到填充的图片恢复到原来的比例。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnI88gIMm8WyKKCkNirnWIDb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤14：按照同样 *** ，填充其他系列数据点，并删除图例，输入图表标题，添加数据标签等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneMqG0OgwSiA8kTqsiiLnDh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤15：选中图表，在“格式”选项卡中单击“形状样式”选项组中的“形状填充”下拉按钮，从列表中选择合适的填充颜色。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOMeUciWG8KumkxJsVePyxc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"步骤16：查看设置好簇状条形图的最终效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoKUIioQyC6uMOWQkvWKQCf"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"添加音频视频","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngeca0U8kcAImQX8jnC *** ph"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"声音的插入与调整","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn6a8I2sGQWoK6WQHYBYycAd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在 *** 演示文稿的过程中，特别是在 *** 商务方面的宣传演示文稿时，可以为幻灯片添加一些合适的声音，添加的声音可以配合图文，使演示文稿变得有声有色，更具感染力。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkEKwksiEYEEIsr0womw8Bg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、常见的音频格式","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMuI6cQ4cciOyqww0BuNkMc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT中常用WAV、MP3和MIDI等格式。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOIeCygiEIAUwYZ3uM6yBNd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（1）WAV格式。WAV格式是Microsoft公司开发的一种声音文件格式，用于保存Windows平台的音频信息资源，被Windows平台及其应用程序所支持，支持多种音频位数、采样频率和声道，是目前计算机上广为流行的声音文件格式，几乎所有的音频编辑软件都识别WAV格式。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOsASCMUyu0CmGQ11Z3C6Me"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（2）MP3格式。MP3格式诞生于20世纪80年代的德国，所谓的MP3是指MPEG标准中的音频部分，也就是MPEG音频层。MPEG音频文件的压缩是一种有损压缩，牺牲了声音文件中的12kHz~16kHz之间高音频部分的质量来压缩文件的大小。相同时间的音乐文件，用MP3格式存储，一般只有WAV文件的1/10，而音质要次于CD格式或WAV格式声音文件。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnk8cm0GksomqactzmIYc6Nh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（3）MIDI格式。MIDI即音乐设备数字接口（MusicalInstrumentDigitalInterface）的英文缩写，是20世纪80年代初为解决电声乐器之间的通信问题而提出的。MIDI传输的不是声音信号，而是音符、控制参数等指令、MIDI文件本身并不包含波形数据，所以MIDI文件非常小巧，非常适合作为网页的背景音乐。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnAOoaisKqeKKA62qgp59joh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、添加各类声音","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOGqUmEQkwaaUW80QEH0K***"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"添加文件中的声音就是将计算机中已存在的声音插人到演示文稿中，也可以从其他的声音文件中添加用户需要的声音。具体 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcns64kKAUwiQUiOkW2OBLAOb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（1）打开“XXX.pptx”，切换至“插入”面板，在“媒体”选项组中单击“音频”的下三角按钮，在弹出的列表框中选择“PC上的音频”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnECCiyGI4Q82Mg7En9k03de"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（2）弹出“插入音频”对话框，选择素材文件夹下的“bgmusicl.mp3”声音文件，单击“插入”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQc4s4wQMs4S9tYXCEKswms"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（3）执行操作后，可以拖曳声音图标至合适位置，按〈F5〉键后幻灯片播放，单击播放按钮就可以听到插入的声音。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcni2WeIwUeaq2YWYhelkkYDe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（4）选择音频文件，执行“音频格式”→“播放”命令，打开“播放”面板，设置“开始”为“单击时”，按〈F5〉键后幻灯片播放，音乐将自动播放。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn66wimCQYwMkwCUlE3mc***c"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"设置声音属性","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCeWU04gC2GkSkgWj4XDqRD"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"打开PowerPoint，选择需要插入的音频文件，切换至“音频格式”→“播放”面板，可设置音频的相关播放属性。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8uAyM6AK8Yyw8h2rXpFzIg"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"添加视频","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4AoAOI422aWuS2oMCAOhWd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"PowerPoint2013中的视频包括视频和动画，可以在幻灯片中插入的视频格式有十几种，PowerPoint支持的视频格式会随着媒体播放器的不同而不同，用户可从剪辑管理器或从外部文件添加视频。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmwGgimSkc4UKYBD6ZKbqdh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、常见的视频格式","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqiGYEI08YmOew5VcbXrJze"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"PPT中常插入的视频格式包括AVI、WMV、MPEG、MOV及SWF等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnI0C0Cmc6IEu4crvtWSdSHb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（1）AVI格式。AVI格式即音频视频交错格式（AudioVideoInterleaved）的英文缩写，是Microsoft公司开发的一种视频文件格式。所谓音频视频交错，是指可以将视频和音频交织在一起进行同步播放。这种视频格式的优点是图像质量好，可以跨平台使用；缺点是体积过于庞大，而且压缩标准不统一，时常会出现视频编码原因而造成视频不能播放等问题。用户如果遇到了这些问题，可以通过下载相应的解码器来解决。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4ckou6IO8***II1GBDYew0c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（2）MOV格式。MOV即QuickTime影片格式，它是Apple公司开发的一种音频、视频文件格式，用于存储常用数字媒体类型。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneASeSyYsgICWoV2w2P5mCe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（3）MPEG格式。MPEG即运动图像专家组格式（MovingPictureExpertGroup）的英文缩写，日常生活中用户欣赏的VCD、DVD就是这种格式，今天常用的有MP4格式。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOSKOo4uWy0gygPlylMT0Kg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（4）WMV格式。WMV即视窗媒体视频（Window***ediaVideo）的英文缩写，是Microsoft公司推出的一种采用独立编码方式并且可以直接在网上实时观看的视频文件压缩格式。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUIMgeCkE4QWy8UN4fcXxOh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（5）SWF格式。SWF（ShockWaveFlash）是ADOBE公司的动画设计软件Flash的专用格式，是一种支持矢量和点阵图形的动画文件格式，被广泛应用于网页设计、动画 *** 等领域，SWF文件通常也被称为Flash文件。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnOIeG4MCC2oYyqcxNsYoPkg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、添加文件中的视频","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUCYsUckgIyOaYVVAiUPHwd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"添加文件中的视频就是将计算机中已存在的视频插人到演示文稿中。具体 *** 如下：","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWUkuK8UaCkUe8dQWiv0b5c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（1）打开“视频的使用.pptx”文件，切换至“插入”面板，在“媒体”选项组中单击“视频”的下三角按钮，在弹出的列表框中选择“PC上的视频”选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0S0AI6MKOWyqesqbBCnyxc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（2）弹出“插入视频”对话框，选择素材文件夹下的“视频样例.wmv”声音文件，单击“插人”按钮。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwg4cUMo8SisYMJsD23pUCf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"（3）执行操作后，可以拖曳声音图标至合适位置，按〈FS〉键后幻灯片播放，单击播放按钮即可播放视频。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnSucisuC2mqsC6ilVtSwUHh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、设置视频属性","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnkM0ymeeoakWSujzu1A7X2z"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在幻灯片中选中插入的视频，切换至“播放”面板，其中“视频选项”选项组中的各页与“音频”选项组中的各选项作用类似，用户可根据需要设置各选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqAMm2***0WO2uyi2t44gqEe"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"打开PowerPoint2013，选择需要插入的视频文件，切换至“视频工具”→“格式”，可设置视频的相关格式属性。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwO***EwYKuaiSKODadL0tUc"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"动画设置 *** ","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCMIGE68ue6K88nRY4ZyDdf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"人类对运动与变化具有天生的敏感。不管这个运动有多么微不足道，变化多么微小，都会强烈地抓住人们的视线。PPT动画的根本在于因内容而变化。对内容的表现力越强，动画效果就越成功。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnmkKsqIYqq6i2yE7P8wcuVh"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"动画的分类","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyyS0u2EGQWuCiE9y7tOAkf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"在PowerPoint中，所谓动画效果主要分为进入动画、强调动画、退出动画和动作路径动画四类，此外，还包括幻灯片切换动画，从而实现了用户对幻灯片中的文本、图形、表格等对象添加不同的动画效果。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcng4A8OaoKGGK0iE9VhbHetd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、进入动画。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"进入动画是对象从“无”到“有”。在触发动画之前，被设置为“进人”动画的对象是不出现的，在触发之后，那它或它们采用何种方式出现，就是“进入”动画要解决的问题。比如设置对象为“进入”动画中的“擦除”效果，可以实现对象从某--方向一点点地出现的效果。进入动画PPT中一般都是使用绿色图标标识。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnyoKakOoe0CKOEfTmpOU7nf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、强调动画。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"强调动画是对象从“有”到“有”，前面的“有”是对象的初始状态，后面的“有”是对象的变化状态。两个状态的变化，起到了对对象强调突出的目的。比如设置对象为“强调动画”中的“变大/变小”效果，可以实现对象从小到大（或设置从大到小）的变化过程，从而产生强调的效果。进入动画PPT中一般都是使用黄色图标标识。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnek4Kwk4giEsq8cMZvgVlNb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、退出动画。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"退出动画与进入动画正好相反，它可以使对象从“有”到“无”。触发后的动画效果与“进入”效果正好相反，对象在没有触发动画之前，是存在屏幕上，而当其被触发后，则从屏幕上以某种设定的效果消失。如设置对象为退出动画中的“切出”效果，则对象在触发后会逐渐地从屏幕上某处切出，从而消失在屏幕上。退出动画PPT中一般都是使用红色图标标识。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnoYiIOKA0IKKq0yZ1SANbAy"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"四、动作路径动画。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"就是对象沿着某条路径运动的动画，在PPT中也可以 *** 出同样的效果，就是将对象设置成“动作路径”效果。比如设置对象为“动作路径”中的“向右”效果，则对象在触发后会沿着设定的方向线移动。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn822mK8e8ugAoGuYZsPPtAc"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"动画的操控 *** ","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcne2IMu2kSa0kQyILxmGXjEh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"选择设置动画的对象，在“动画窗格”中，选择一个动画，单击右边的下拉箭头，弹出的下拉菜单。单击“计时”选项中的“开始”按钮，会弹出下拉列表框。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMWqEg4cgOWWmGOQLvBeR3g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"一、单击开始。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"只有在多单击一次鼠标之后该动画才会出现。例如想要让两个对象逐一顺序显示，单击一次出现一个，再单击一次再出现一个，那么两个出现动作都应该选择“单击开始”动作选项。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneEQKGOSGy620LL2hObcYt6"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"二、从上一项开始。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"该动作会和上一个动作同时开始。例如把之一个对象设置为“单击开始”，第二个对象设置为“从上一项开始”，那么单击一次之后，两个对象的动画会同时进行。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn04AMYo0YW6M0h8t4yAlKFk"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"三、从上一项之后开始。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"上一动画执行完之后该动作就会自动执行。对于两个对象，如果第二个对象选择了这个选项，那么只需单击一次，两个对象的动画就会先后逐一进行。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQ6uM4wmUEWIiwjEPpXzG0b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"四、效果选项。","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"单击会打开“效果”选项卡。在这里，可以对动作的属性进行调整。对于不同的动作，此选项卡的内容会有些差别。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnU6qaAyqYQak4OIoym4kCRb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"最后是给各位职场人士的提示，千万不要为了追求PPT的美观而忽略了其内容的重要性，建议在掌握PPT设计技能前，将重点放在内容表达上，利用常规的PPT操作做出满足职场要求的作品才是正道。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuM6oCGMOqy2mSc6tJPL7cd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcni24qeo44OA2sueJhxJhU6g"}]%3C%2Fhowto_content%3E

4、写隶书的技巧？

隶书是五体中最容易学的字体，相对可以快速成型。没有基础的人，2个月就可以照着帖写个七八分形似。

毛笔

刚开始学习书法的时候根据不同的字体选择合适的笔，隶书用的比较多的就是兼毫笔，兼毫笔是介于羊笔与狼豪笔之间的一种毛笔，写的时候非常有韧性，吸墨比较大，非常适合书写。

羊笔是用青羊或者是黄羊的尾毫 *** 而成的，比较适合笔比较重的书法，写出来的字比较的柔软,没有笔锋，粗笔的吸墨比较大，写出来的字笔画圆润厚实，粗笔十分耐用。

隶书在用笔的时候注意起笔蚕头收笔燕尾，所以在写的时候要注意将笔画写成一种近似蚕头的形状，收笔的时候向右上方斜向挑笔出锋。

技巧

横画

横画是隶书中有特色的笔画，往往以“横飞”为美。隶书的横画有两种，一为平横，一为波横。

有方笔圆笔两种。

平横

是指横呈水平状，一般逆锋起笔，折笔中锋运行，回锋收笔或露锋收笔。平横有凸形、凹形和基本平形。

波横

是波笔的一种，是指横画具有俯仰之态。一般逆锋起笔，折笔重顿，形成蚕头，然后提笔运行，至收笔处顿挫出锋，形成燕尾。亦有蚕头小燕尾大的现象。波横一般要写得厚重圆润，蚕头、燕尾都要饱满，横中略向上弯。

竖画

竖画一个笔画多数为圆起圆收，有些竖末端较尖，亦不属楷书悬针竖，而是写时自然收结。隶书的竖一般均为逆锋起笔，中锋徐行，藏锋收笔。竖画在隶书中有三种形式：中竖，向左弧竖，向右弧竖。也有方笔，即逆锋起笔，向左上角切，折笔下行。虽然竖画在隶书中不如波画有特色，但书写时同样不可轻视。

勾画

竖勾

藏锋起笔后转笔向下，宜挺直，至转弯处要圆转，然后向左运笔，边行边提出锋。

短勾

该笔画在行至转弯处，要求圆转，其钩不宜粗大，微向上钩。

横折钩

该笔画实为折与钩的组合，在书写时把二者有机的结合在一笔，做到连贯自然。

横钩

藏锋逆入向右行笔，行笔至钩处，提笔向上转笔向左下写钩（斜势），用笔先按后提，钩露锋收笔。

硬笔

用美工笔或者是套装的漫画笔，注意提按，隶书的波折就体现出来了。

技巧

横画

隶书的横切记“雁不双飞”即每字只应有一个重点的波磔横。如年字上两横为平横，其笔势宜缩，末横为波磔横，其笔势应放。

竖画

竖多用于门字以及象门字这样以对称竖作为主笔的字中。双人旁的竖笔用右弯竖，如德，往，役，征等字。隶书的直竖用得较多,有悬针竖、垂露竖等。

勾画

横勾

横沟就是横画末端带出来的一个小钩，关键是要把前面的横写好，写到末端停住迅速带出个小钩。横钩有点像是鹰的嘴巴。

练习

勾摹法

所谓勾摹，就是将字帖中的字用描摹纸进行勾线后再描写的一种书写 *** ，这种 *** 适用于初学隶书的书法爱好者。

其 *** 是：将字帖放置于桌面，再将书写纸盖于字帖之上，用铅笔在上面进行单线或双线勾勒，一个字一个字地勾完成，最后将字帖抽出，放在目光之前，在勾好的毛边纸上进行填充描写。

这样做的效果是容易规范笔法和字形，缺点是较费时间。

放大精准书写法

放大精准书写法的目的是为了更加准确地看到原字笔画及字形的主要特点，以利于精准临摹。

其 *** 是：将字帖中的几个或多个字进行复印放大，甚至可以放大到10倍以上，在临摹时可以看见点画中的“笔法"，如提按、绞转，尤其是对于笔画的粗细会看得十分清楚，临摹时就会掌握它的笔法了。

对临法

有了一定基础后，我们就可以进入到对临的 *** 之中了。所谓对临，就是照着字帖去临摹。许多人一开始就进入对临阶段，这个 *** 对于初学者来说是不提倡的。但是，对临恰恰可以培养书写能力，提升书写水平。

对临时，要注意几个问题，一是控制好速度 ，不可太快。二是注意节奏变化，节奏其实就是用笔的 *** ，后面再谈。

%3Chowto_content%3E[{"type":"paragraph","attrs":{"is_abstract":true},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"隶书是五体中最容易学的字体，相对可以快速成型。没有基础的人，","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"2","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"个月就可以照着帖写个七八分形似。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnIGA0a8ew4OiQ8LDKtavVcb"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"毛笔","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnm8gCkmAYgsiy4GtJs4hGYb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"刚开始学习书法的时候根据不同的字体选择合适的笔，隶书用的比较多的就是兼毫笔，兼毫笔是介于羊笔与狼豪笔之间的一种毛笔，写的时候非常有韧性，","id":""},{"type":"text","text":"吸墨比较大，非常适合书写。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnUUI0GwQIuaOwZiGEfPhHhw"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":400,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"毛笔","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/441b3ff703f64ae591b26373a9b1b04c","width":600},"text":"","id":"doxcnkgWwe2EKWWeosRBuw24Icc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"羊笔是用青羊或者是黄羊的尾毫 *** 而成的，比较适合笔比较重的书法，写出来的字比较的柔软,没有笔锋，粗笔的吸墨比较大，写出来的字笔画圆润厚实，粗笔十分耐用。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQ0YsAsoOuWOYYt *** U6JHJf"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":400,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"毛笔","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/4b18945b1d7b461485c144627863a888","width":600},"text":"","id":"doxcniyWokkeQKM8Yw5by1Yek0e"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"隶书在用笔的时候注意起笔蚕头收笔燕尾，所以在写的时候要注意将笔画写成一种近似蚕头的形状，收笔的时候向右上方斜向挑笔出锋。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0egWue0wQq8cA1qSdrPGke"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"技巧","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneykoe8CUycSieitcvk3DOf"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"横画","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn4ycG2eoIaq2m4O2ZUwijfd"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"横画是隶书中有特色的笔画，往往以“横飞”为美。隶书的横画有两种，一为平横，一为波横。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2YIYQ00OO2MUcLIgm7PiEg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"有方笔圆笔两种。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYOyYkeukMS20GK404KXGue"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":394,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"横画","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/e995a3a37a28463cad9a61ed890c8d3c","width":872},"text":"","id":"doxcnY8ESA0WU2Yg4uqu9uUBeec"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"平横","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuQka4QwqGYYwAHSPzRlw3g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"是指横呈水平状，一般逆锋起笔，折笔中锋运行，回锋收笔或露锋收笔。平横有凸形、凹形和基本平形。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCsk6egS8c4SKcR9edvoA3c"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":93,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"横画","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/e2e01b232f1042c3a31bad117a15455a","width":185},"text":"","id":"doxcn4WEykyEI00Ws0WvNAJCyEf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"波横","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn0M2ICYWQkGUmQ50***8CWse"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"是波笔的一种，是指横画具有俯仰之态。一般逆锋起笔，折笔重顿，形成蚕头，然后提笔运行，至收笔处顿挫出锋，形成燕尾。亦有蚕头小燕尾大的现象。波横一般要写得厚重圆润，蚕头、燕尾都要饱满，横中略向上弯。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnISe6460c6E4Qkv4dbI6jwd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":118,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"横画","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/995399a440d04702bf196dc2f50c252c","width":276},"text":"","id":"doxcngE82IyGUKug0uYVS16piBb"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"竖画","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnA06giC2wscuYIPyd0VQP6b"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"竖画一个笔画多数为圆起圆收，有些竖末端较尖，亦不属楷书悬针竖，而是写时自然收结。隶书的竖一般均为逆锋起笔，中锋徐行，藏锋收笔。竖画在隶书中有三种形式：中竖，向左弧竖，向右弧竖。也有方笔，即逆锋起笔，向左上角切，折笔下行。虽然竖画在隶书中不如波画有特色，但书写时同样不可轻视。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnC8AMwyKUkEyYwUo30cjTrb"},{"type":"imageList","children":[{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":97,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"竖画","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/02265416663949e1bec8106b5805fff6","width":329},"text":"","id":"doxcnioUi0IOsW6Sk6j46PTXAUd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":392,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"竖画","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/07e73a0940744fa2a4a8735f3fbb166a","width":652},"text":"","id":"doxcn0msUQW6QOWOeK4tAdLgAVc"}],"text":"","id":"doxcno862QKKoM80SACDoXFKmfb"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"勾画","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcno862QKKoM80SACDoXFKmfb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"竖勾","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8K8UUieQ24u6OcbTeqpTid"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"藏锋起笔后转笔向下，宜挺直，至转弯处要圆转，然后向左运笔，边行边提出锋。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniiQ46q20q8iE0QYFkT55Qf"},{"type":"imageList","children":[{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":171,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"勾画","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/8e1269eff6a147c8a53c8d25072b828e","width":193},"text":"","id":"doxcnA4qe62yeaoGoUJm2Y5lyEd"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":486,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"勾画","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/931bd51bd23c48d0a907bf6aec445287","width":430},"text":"","id":"doxcnIW444iwqmCEOIzMWpB7kre"}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWmOsKac6AUAOEvgVtCzIqU"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"短勾","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWmOsKac6AUAOEvgVtCzIqU"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"该笔画在行至转弯处，要求圆转，其钩不宜粗大，微向上钩。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnu2yg06EsEcsYSnIoPm9y9Y"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":210,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"勾画","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/eed8d31bc926478bb43e8d5398b3b7e3","width":195},"text":"","id":"doxcn62IeamEOsomObiRH0T06NW"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"横折钩","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwUOEeqUmcamWp74WSIGVE0"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"该笔画实为折与钩的组合，在书写时把二者有机的结合在一笔，做到连贯自然。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcneqMYqkigsUQe4bnbKxmUrb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":177,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"勾画","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/e304db8ef90b40b8aac6f2135a15ac16","width":199},"text":"","id":"doxcn2YsOOCOQcCeAygfc8dL74c"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"横钩 ","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnMQE2QWOOyEESYp1kwVO2ae"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"藏锋逆入向右行笔，行笔至钩处，提笔向上转笔向左下写钩（斜势），用笔先按后提，钩露锋收笔。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnk0IQ6UuS8IGKwnbMIhIj7d"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":208,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"勾画","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/91b5b95b5f6444b38bbc82418eb7ff29","width":199},"text":"","id":"doxcnSsgaggKUiYWUELn8D4dw6c"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"硬笔","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2s8SEuyoqMgaqwDbft0ICZ"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"用美工笔或者是套装的漫画笔，注意提按，隶书的波折就体现出来了。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEU8KiWIw0c0m0MmwYMAvKb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":488,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"硬笔","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/df156d589b224183ac1acb3ea9e9db3d","width":701},"text":"","id":"doxcnq8KqiG0gmoIESKRkjrvEif"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"技巧","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnuocOK26kQqA86wauvhdqfb"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"横画","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn8AcWocaSOw0okFpdBym7Nh"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"隶书的横切记“雁不双飞”即每字只应有一个重点的波磔横。如年字上两横为平横，其笔势宜缩，末横为波磔横，其笔势应放。\\n","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn2m0Qi8y82cuU6hhQIvZ2ve"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":256,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"横画","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/19e4fbf4f5594ab9813f7aee4a0f2bd7","width":376},"text":"","id":"doxcnWks80Y8wm2ESKNW23y7q6X"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"竖画","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcniY2MsiGMOyaKgvCBu9I5Pb"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"竖多用于门字以及象门字这样以对称竖作为主笔的字中。双人旁的竖笔用右弯竖，如德，往，役，征等字。隶书的直竖用得较多,有悬针竖、垂露竖等。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnGQ4qoKEQmQkikXrdtutPTb"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":316,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"竖画","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/3a0a9a4e7a8d490081b364c3ac68fe48","width":358},"text":"","id":"doxcnYao4SKWOaIwYcVrY2SHHGc"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":3},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"勾画","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcn66uII26IA28CMxeZKNZv9d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","marks":[{"type":"strong"}],"text":"横勾","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKA4G8oWUy6kseoSF *** VuNg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"横沟就是横画末端带出来的一个小钩，关键是要把前面的横写好，写到末端停住迅速带出个小钩。横钩有点像是鹰的嘴巴。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnQgu2EeS0cMWKuUwYtbLmSh"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":350,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"勾画","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/31fd3bdb652b4026a923cfaa316b178b","width":358},"text":"","id":"doxcnQqU4UoeSuC2U0wepZH9jHh"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":1},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"练习","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnECu2yyS0gqiMWSXLe8UL8c"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"勾摹法","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnaKE28MEmuuAUi0CO2y7YXf"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"所谓勾摹，就是将字帖中的字用描摹纸进行勾线后再描写的一种书写 *** ，这种 *** 适用于初学隶书的书法爱好者。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnEcua8cGIASSSSggcFk6Ltc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"其 *** 是：将字帖放置于桌面，再将书写纸盖于字帖之上，用铅笔在上面进行单线或双线勾勒，一个字一个字地勾完成，最后将字帖抽出，放在目光之前，在勾好的毛边纸上进行填充描写。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnO4aiWGMegsgGSIy1TRyv9g"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"这样做的效果是容易规范笔法和字形，缺点是较费时间。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnYcyYOyeEywUKGsNptgnrPc"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":400,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"勾摹法","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/802ff84b02774b39901686b8d415cc2f","width":600},"text":"","id":"doxcnyO4aY2IoyQe4l5rG4NJ8qd"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"放大精准书写法","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnKA8W88A0sgUqcp9yZULt8d"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"放大精准书写法的目的是为了更加准确地看到原字笔画及字形的主要特点，以利于精准临摹。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnCWoauMS2oa2KsLJElkdmDc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"其 *** 是：将字帖中的几个或多个字进行复印放大，甚至可以放大到10倍以上，在临摹时可以看见点画中的“笔法\"，如提按、绞转，尤其是对于笔画的粗细会看得十分清楚，临摹时就会掌握它的笔法了。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnymyioGAAesWc6MEBl578Sg"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":400,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"放大精准书写法","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/c96b9cb56e6d44cdad59e3ab46d7b449","width":600},"text":"","id":"doxcnQW0YoiOKSei0e0ZHyEJfLf"},{"type":"heading","attrs":{"level":2},"children":[{"type":"text","text":"对临法","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcngoGMcKgSyiIEGghy4wtRLc"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"有了一定基础后，我们就可以进入到对临的 *** 之中了。所谓对临，就是照着字帖去临摹。许多人一开始就进入对临阶段，这个 *** 对于初学者来说是不提倡的。但是，对临恰恰可以培养书写能力，提升书写水平。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnqacmo2oeWeowI580Tzo4Th"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"对临时，要注意几个问题，一是控制好速度 ，不可太快。二是注意节奏变化，节奏其实就是用笔的 *** ，后面再谈。","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnWEc6eawGoYg8CGpLp2zHDh"},{"type":"image","attrs":{"height":400,"note":[{"type":"text","text":"对临法","id":""}],"url":"{{image_domain}}tos-cn-i-qvj2lq49k0/8a3e6fc4a140441592026824e202b9b6","width":600},"text":"","id":"doxcns4YmA8Eeww4oaoHVpOkWIg"},{"type":"paragraph","children":[{"type":"text","text":"","id":""}],"text":"","id":"doxcnwWGCGWKi6AIwGkNzZX65Kg"}]%3C%2Fhowto_content%3E

5、CNC编程是做产品好还是模具？

区别：

1、刀具不同CNC产品编程一般都是铣平面钻孔攻丝等；五金模编程就是加工型腔等。

2、程式不同CNC产品编程程式一般都很简单，手动编程一般够用；五金模编程程式都很长，必须电脑编程。

3、传输方式不同CNC产品编程程式一般直接在机床边上手动编程就可以了；五金模编程程式用电脑将程式编出来，通过R232 CF卡局域网等传至机床上。2、铣非平面，多用球刀，少用端刀，不要怕接刀；3、小刀清角，大刀精修；

4、不要怕补面，适当补面可以提高加工速度，美化加工效果.

5、毛坯材料硬度高：逆铣较好6、毛坯材料硬度低：顺铣较好7、机床精度好、刚性好、精加工：较适应顺铣，反之较适应逆铣8、零件内拐角处精加工强烈建议要用顺铣。9、粗加工：逆铣较好，精加工：顺铣较好10、刀具材料韧性好、硬度低：较适应粗加工（大切削量加工）11、刀具材料韧性差、硬度高：较适应精加。